Skip to main content

Full text of "A new English grammar, logical and historical"

See other formats


CO 


PE 

1101 

S8 

V.2 

C.2 

ROBARTS 


NEW    ENGLISH    GRAMMAR 

SWEET 


VOL.    II. 


Oxford  University  Press 

London        Edinburgh        Glasgow        Copenhagen 

New  Tork     Toronto     Melbourne     Cape  Town 

Bombay     Calcutta     Madras     Shanghai 

Humphrey  Milford  Publisher  to  the  University 


A  NEW 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR 

LOGICAL  AND   HISTORICAL 


BY 


HENRY   SWEET,  M.A.,   Ph.D.,   LL.D. 

MEMBER  OF  THE  MUNICH,    BERLIN,  AND  COPENHAGEN  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES 
UNIVERSITY   READER   IN  PHONETICS  AT  OXFORD 

Formerly  President  of  the  Philological  Society 

Editor  of  The  Oldest  English  Texts^  Alfred' s  "^  Cura  Pastoralis'  and'Orcsius' 

Author  of  ^Ah  Anglo-Saxon  Reader ' 

"■A  Firsf  and  ''A  Second  Middle- English  Primer' 

*A  Primer  of  Spoken  English,'  "A  History  of  English  Sounds' 

'A  Primer  of  Phonetics,'  'Shelley's  Nature- Poetry,''  etc. 


PABT  II— SYNTAX. 


OXFORD 
AT  THE  CLARENDON  PRESS 


Pt 
■    ^^ 

Impression  of  1924 
First  edition,  i8g8 


Printed  in  England 


PREFACE 


The  first  part  of  this  grammar  appeared  in  1892.  The 
delay  in  bringing  out  the  second  part  is  due  to  a  variety  of 
causes.  For  some  years  the  whole  of  my  time  was  given  to 
my  Student's  Dictionary  of  Anglo-Saxon,  and  in  the  interval 
I  have,  among  other  work,  made  a  thorough  revision  of  my 
Anglo-Saxon  Reader.  And  after  giving  so  much  time  to 
promoting  the  study  of  English  in  this  country,  I  felt  that 
I  could,  with  a  good  conscience,  return  to  those  wider 
studies  in  comparative  philology  to  which  I  feel  more  and 
more  drawn. 

On  the  other  hand,  there  have  been  so  many  enquiries 
after  the  Syntax  that  I  did  not  like  to  delay  it  any  longer. 
I  have  therefore  limited  its  scope  by  confining  myself  to 
formal  syntax  (§  582)  and  excluding  what  can  be  found  in 
the  dictionary,  such  as  the  use  of  prepositions,  and  so  have 
been  able  to  give  all  the  more  prominence  to  syntax  proper, 
especially  those  branches  which  have  hitherto  been  neglected, 
such  as  word-order. 

It  will  be  found  by  comparison  with  other  grammars  that 
my  syntax  is  fairly  complete  from  this  point  of  view.  It 
must  be  noted  that  there  is  a  good  deal  of  syntax  in  the 


VI  PREFACE. 

introduction  to  the  first  part,  where,  for  instance,  the  analysis 
of  sentences  is  fully  dealt  with. 

Note  the  use  of  nominal  as  a  common  term  for  nouns 
and  adjectives. 

The  mark  f  is  used  to  indicate  literary  as  opposed  to 
colloquial.     For  the  use  of  (;)  as  a  stress-mark  see  §  1 88 1. 


HENRY   SWEET. 


Oxford, 
July  II,  1898. 


CONTENTS 


WORD-ORDER. 

Form I 

General  Pi*inciples 2 

Emphasis  §  1765.  Convenience  §  1767.  Grammatical 
Order  §  1770.  General  Principles  of  English  Order  and  its 
Changes  §  1772. 

Adjeotives 7 

More  than  One  Adjective  §  1789. 

Genitives 10 

Modifying  Nouns 10 

Pronouns ii 

Verbs 12 

Verb  +  Subject  §  1806.   After  Front  Words  §  1807.   Modifier 
+  Verb  §  1818.     Several  Verb-modifiers  §  1823. 
Verbals  and  Periphrastio  Verbs       .        .        .        .         16 

Adverbs 18 

Adverbs  +  Nominals  or  Adverbs  §  1834.  Verb  +  Adverb 
§  1838.     Adverb  +  Verb  §  1846.     Front  Adverbs  §  1854. 

Sentence-Words 23 

Conjunctions  and  Dependent  Adverbs    ...  24 

Broken  Order 24 

Cross-order 25 

Front-order 26 


Vlil  CONTENTS. 

PAGK 

Group-order 26 

Verbal-groups  §  1872. 

Sentences 27 

Elliptical  Order 28 

SENTENCE-STRESS 28 

INTONATION 37 

NOUNS. 

Qender 42 

Number 44 

Singular  Individual  Noun  =  Collective  Noun  §  1966.  Collective 
Nouns  with  Plural  Constructions  §  1972.  Changes  of  Mean- 
ing in  Plural  §  1975.     Used  only  in  the  Plural  §  1979. 

Cases 48 

Common  Case  §  1985.     Genitive  §  1996. 

ARTICLES 54 

Definite  Article 55 

Referring  Back  §    2014.     Identifying   §    2019.     Absolutely 
Defining  §  2026.     Class-  and  Collective  §   2028.     Unique        / 
§  2031.    With  Abstract  Nouns  §  2033.    With  Proper  Names 
§  2035.     With  Absolute  Adjectives  §  2038. 

Indefinite  Article 61 

Articles  Omitted 63 

ADJECTIVES. 

Absolute ,        .        .  65 

Free 66 

Comparison 67 

Comparison  of  o/d  §  2084. 

PRONOUNS. 

Personal 71 

Indefinite  §  2097.  Pleonastic  §  2099.  Gender  §  2101. 
Prepositional  Genitive  §  2102. 

Possessive 73 

W^ith  General  Adjectives  §  an 2.     Emphatic  §  21 16. 


CONTENTS.  IX 

PAGE 

Interrogative 76 

Kelative yy 

NUMERALS    . 81 

VERBS. 

Number 81 

Person 83 

Tenses 85 

have-ioxms  §  2165.  do-ioxms,  §  2169.  will  w^d  shall  §  2196. 
Definite  Tenses  §  2203.  Present  §  2223.  Preterite  §  2233. 
Perfect  §  2240.  Pluperfect  §  2347.  Future  J  2249.  Preterite 
Future  §  2252.  Perfect  Future  §  2253.  Immediate  Future 
§  2255. 

Moods 107 

Subjunctive  S  2259.  Conditional  §  2277.  Compulsive  {is 
to  .  .  .)  %  2297.     Permissive  {may)  §  3301. 

Voice  (Active  and  Passive) 117 

Infinitive  and  Supine 118 

Gerund 120 

Participles 122 

Present  §  3337.    Preterite  §  2356. 


SYNTAX 
WORD-ORDER. 

Form. 

1759.  As  regards  the  relative  order  of  two  words,  we 
distinguish  between  pre-position  and  post-position.  Thus 
pre-adjunct  or  pre-adjective  position  means  that  the  adjunct- 
word  precedes  its  head-word,  or  that  the  adjective  precedes 
its  noun.  We  may  call  such  an  adjective  a  *  pre-adjective,' 
or,  more  definitely,  a  *  noun-preceding  adjective ' ;  so  also 
we  can  define  the  noun  as  an  *  adjective-following  noun.' 

In  groups  or  sentences  composed  of  more  than  two  words 
we  distinguish  front-,  mid-,  and  end-  position,  the  last  two 
being  included  under  non-initial  position.  Thus  a  verb  at 
the  end  of  a  sentence  is  said  to  have  end-position :  such 
a  verb  may  be  called  an  *  end- verb.'  If  such  a  verb  were 
put  at  the  beginning  of  the  sentence,  it  would  be  called 
a  '  front-shifted '  verb. 

Position  may  be  to  some  extent  accidental.  Thus  the  end- 
verb  order  in  such  a  sentence  as  //  rains  is  merely  the  result  of 
the  shortness  of  the  sentence,  so  that  it  is  a  case  only  of  what 
may  be  called  *  negative  *  end-verb  position. 

We  also  have  to  distinguish  between  joined  and  broken 
(1860),  and  between  parallel  and  cross  (1865)  order.  For 
tag-order  see  §  1774. 

VOL.  II.  B 


2  SYNTAX.  C§  1760. 

1760.  We  have  lastly  to  distinguish  between  fixed  and 
free  order.  Some  languages  are  freer  in  their  order  than 
others.  Very  free  order  is  possible  only  in  inflected  lan- 
guages. Conversely,  absolutely  fixed  order  occurs  only  in 
languages  devoid  of  inflection.  Even  in  one  and  the  same 
language  some  kinds  of  words  may  have  freer  order  than 
others :  this  is  the  case  with  the  English  adverbs.  Hence 
in  most  languages  there  is  a  distinction  between  normal 
(regular)  and  exceptional  order.  This  distinction  is,  of 
course,  most  marked  in  highly  inflectional  languages. 

Even  in  languages  whose  order  is  comparatively  fixed  there 
are  many  devices  for  evading  the  restrictions  of  the  normal  order. 

General  Principles. 

1761.  The  divergencies  between  the  word-orders  of 
different  languages,  and  the  inconsistencies  in  the  word- 
order  of  one  and  the  same  language,  are  the  result  of  the 
conflict  of  various  general  principles. 

1762.  From  a  strictly  logical  point  of  view  we  should 
expect  connective  words  always  to  come  between  the  words 
they  connect — we  should  expect  prepositions  always  to  pre- 
cede the  word  they  govern,  relative  words  as  conjunctions 
always  to  have  the  front  position  in  the  sentences  they 
introduce,  and  so  on.  We  should  further  expect  subject 
+  predicate  order.  In  a  less  degree,  we  should  expect 
post-adjunct  order  to  prevail — we  should  expect  assumptive 
adjectives  to  follow  their  nouns.  But,  as  a  matter  of  fact, 
none  of  these  general  principles  are  carried  out  universally  in 
language. 

1763.  The  most  frequent  deviation  from  purely  logical 
principles  is  the  pre-adjunct  order  adjective  +  noun.  This 
order  was  probably  originally  emphatic  (1765).  From 
a  practical  point  of  view  the  main  distinction  between  the 
pre-adjunct  order  big  black  dogs  and  the  post-adjunct  order 


§1767.]     WORD-ORDER:    GENERAL   PRINCIPLES.  3 

*dogs  big  black  is  that  the  former  is  suspensive — it  makes  us 
expect  something  to  complete  the  sentence — and  hence  is 
more  connective  than  the  post-adjunct  order,  and  binds 
adjunct  and  head-word  more  closely  together.  The  looser 
post-adjunct  order  is,  on  the  other  hand,  naturally  used  in 
apposition,  even  by  languages  which  otherwise  prefer  pre- 
adjunct  order. 

1764.  As  negation  generally  reverses  the  meaning  of  its 
head-word,  it  is  most  convenient  practically  to  let  it  precede 
its  head- word,  so  that  the  hearer's  mind  may  be  fully 
prepared  for  the  reversal  of  meaning.  Hence  languages 
which  otherwise  have  the  order  verb  +  adverb  may  have  the 
order  negation-word  -H  verb,  as  in  the  Old-English  ne  cume 
ge{lQ01). 

Emphasis. 

1765.  The  most  general  way  of  making  a  word  prominent 
is  by  putting  it  before  the  others — if  possible,  at  the  begin- 
ning of  the  sentence.  Thus  in  Latin  the  normal  order  in  such 
sentences  as  *  Caesar  conquered  the  Gauls  *  is  to  put  the  verb 
at  the  end  {Caesar  Gallds  devicit)^  but  if  the  sentence  were 
meant  to  imply  that  Caesar  conquered  the  Gauls  and  not 
some  other  people,  the  word  expressing  the  logically  pro- 
minent idea  *  Gauls'  would  have  front-position  {Gallds  Caesar 
devicit). 

1766.  But  there  is  another  more  general  principle  of 
position-emphasis — that  of  making  a  word  conspicuous  by 
putting  it  in  any  abnormal — that  is,  unexpected — position. 
Thus  a  word  whose  normal  position  is  front  or  mid  may  be 
made  emphatic  by  end-position,  as  in  the  Latin  sentence 
aliud  Her  habemus  nullum  *we  have  no  other  road,'  where 
*  none '  has  emphatic  end-position»  Emphatic  end-position  is 
suspensive  (1763). 

Convenience. 

1767.  It  is  evident  that  emphatic  order  often  leads  to 
inconvenience,  as  in  the  last  example,  where  we  have  the 

B  2 


4  SYNTAX,  [§  1768. 

double  inconvenience  of  the  separation  of  nullum  from  its 
head-word — broken  order — and  of  suspensiveness,  the 
meaning  of  the  three  first  words  being  completely  reversed 
by  nullum, 

1768.  But  a  purely  logical  order  may  also  lead  to  in- 
convenience. Thus,  as  we  have  seen  (1763),  pre-adjunct 
order  has  certain  advantages  over  the  more  logical  post- 
adjunct  order,  especially  in  negation  (1764),  while  in  other 
cases  post-adjunct  order  may  be  more  convenient.  Indeed, 
the  best  results  are  often  obtained  by  a  concurrent  use  of 
both,  as  we  see  in  the  English  order  subject-adjunct  + 
subject  -f-  verb  +  verb-adjunct,  which  is  the  result  of  the 
striving  to  avoid  the  suspensive  end-verb  order. 

1769.  In  the  Latin  sentence  last  quoted  broken  order  and 
suspensiveness  work  together.  But  in  some  cases  broken 
order  is  a  means  of  avoiding  suspensiveness,  as  in  good  men 
and  true,  where  the  inconsistent  use  of  pre-  and  post-  adjunct 
order  in  the  same  word-group  diminishes  the  suspensiveness 
of  the  consistently  pre-adjunct  order  in  good  and  true  mm. 

Grammatical  Order. 

1770.  We  see,  then,  that  in  languages  which  have  both 
a  normal  and  an  exceptional  order,  the  latter  is  due  to  a 
variety  of  causes,  the  most  important  of  which  is  emphasis. 
In  such  languages  the  normal  order  is  grammatical 
(syntactic),  serving  to  show  the  grammatical  relation  between 
words.  The  fewer  the  inflections,  the  more  important  this 
function  becomes,  but  even  highly  inflected  languages  observe 
general  principles  of  syntactic  order,  however  freely  they  may 
disregard  them  in  special  cases. 

1771.  An  order  which  is  exceptional  in  one  period  may 
become  normal  in  another  period.  Thus  the  pre-adjunct 
order  of  Old  and  Modern  English  was  probably  originally 
emphatic  (1765).  In  Old  and  Modern  English  as  well  as  in 
most  other  languages  interrogative   words  generally  have 


§  I775-3     WORD-ORDER  :     GENERAL    PRINCIPLES.  5 

front-order,  as  in  where  ts  he?  compared  with  he  is  there; 
this  order,  again,  was  probably  at  first  only  emphatic.  The 
front-shifting  of  the  verb  in  interrogative  sentences  (will he? 
compared  with  he  will)  was  also  probably  at  first  simply  the 
result  of  emphasizing  the  predicate,  as  also  the  front-shifting 
of  the  verb  in  imperative  sentences  (come ye  /). 

General  Principles  of  English  Order  and  its  Changes. 

1772.  What  appears  to  be  the  original  Arian  word-order 
is  preserved  in  the  early  Sanskrit  prose. 

1773.  In  a  normal  Arian  declarative  sentence  the  subject 
is  followed  by  its  modifier  the  verb,  but  otherwise  pre-adjunct 
order  prevails;  thus  genitives  and  adjectives  precede  their 
nouns,  and  adverbs,  accusatives  etc.  precede  their  verbs,  the 
result  being  that  the  verb  comes  at  the  end  of  the  sentence, 
as  it  continued  to  do  in  Latin  (1765). 

The  same  pre-adjunct  order  prevails  in  Arian  compounds 
(1546),  which  shows  that  this  order  must  be  very  old  in  Arian. 

1774.  In  careless  speech  it  often  happens  that  a  speaker 
finishes  a  sentence  grammatically,  and  then  adds  one  or 
more  words  as  an  after-thought,  to  complete  the  meaning  or 
define  it  more  clearly.  Such  tag-sentences  are  frequent  in 
Arian,  so  that  a  verb  which  would  otherwise  have  end- 
position  loses  it,  just  as  in  English  we  may  say  he  came, 
John  instead  of  he,  John,  came  =John  came, 

m5.  As  these  tagged  sentences  were  generally  longer 
than  the  normal  end-verb  sentences,  and  as  it  was  found 
inconvenient  to  put  the  verb  at  the  end  of  long  sentences 
generally,  whether  tagged  or  not,  a  tendency  might  easily 
develop  to  give  up  end-verb  order  altogether  except  in  short, 
familiar  sentences.*  Accordingly,  we  can  observe  in  the 
separate  Arian  languages  a  gradual  retraction  of  the  verb- 
position  towards  the  subject-word ;  thus,  already  in  Old 
Greek  the  verb  is  generally  put  immediately  after  its  subject- 


6  SYNTAX.  [§  X776. 

word,  the  verb  being  thus  followed,  instead  of  preceded,  by 
its  own  modifiers,  just  as  in  Modern  English — Caesar  con- 
quered the  Gauls, 

1776.  Verb-position  in  Old-English  tends  to  follow  the 
same  general  principles  as  in  Modern  German.  In  inde- 
pendent declarative  sentences,  such  as  the  one  just  given,  the 
order  is  the  same  as  in  Modern  English ;  but  in  dependent 
sentences  the  verb  has  end-position :  *when  Caesar  the  Gauls 
conquered  had.  In  other  words,  the  original  Arian  word-order 
was  preserved  in  dependent  sentences  because  they  are 
generally  shorter  and  more  compact  than  independent  ones, 
till  at  last  end-verb  order  came  to  be  the  grammatical  mark 
of  dependence. 

1777.  But,  as  we  see  from  the  last  example,  this  end-verb 
order  may  often  lead  to  illogical  and  clumsy  collocations. 
And  when  a  more  convenient  order  had  already  established 
itself  in  independent  sentences,  it  was  natural  to  extend  the 
order  of  these  to  the  dependent  sentences  as  well,  the  result 
being  the  Modern  English  order  when  Caesar  had  conquered 
the  Gauls  parallel  to  Caesar  had  conquered  the  Gauls. 

1778.  Old-English,  having  a  considerable  number  of 
inflections,  was  able  to  preserve  a  good  deal  of  the  freedom 
of  Arian  word-order,  being  in  this  respect  intermediate  be- 
tween Latin  and  Modern  German. 

1779.  In  Middle  and  Modern  English  we  observe  the 
same  gradual  restriction  of  the  older  freedom  as  in  German 
and  the  other  Modern  Germanic  languages.  But  while  in 
Modern  German  the  Parent  Germanic  order  was,  so  to  say, 
fossilized,  English  agrees  with  Swedish  and  Danish  in 
developing  a  more  natural  and  logical  order,  characterized 
especially  by  the  prevalence  of  mid- verb  position. 

In  the  following  details  of  English  word-order,  principles 
which  are  common  to   Old  and  Modern  English   are,  as 


§1786.]  WORD-ORDER:     ADJECTIVES.  ^ 

a  general  rule,  treated  only  from  the  Modern  English  point 
of  view. 

Adjectives. 

1780.^  Assumptive  adjective- words  precede  their  head- 
words :  young  man,  running  water,  settled  weather,  many 
men,  three  men,  my  house,  the  earth. 

1781.  But  post-order  is  frequent  in  Old-English  with 
quantitative  adjectives:  Sumorsmte  ealle  'all  the  people  of 
Somerset '  |  his  suna  twegen  '  his  two  sons  *  |  hie  butu  '  both 
of  them '  (the  two  armies)  |  wcBter  genog,  where  Modern 
English  has  both  orders — enough  {of)  water,  water  enough, 
the  latter  being  less  emphatic.  In  Old-English  also  the 
postposition  of  these  adjectives  seems  to  be  the  result  of 
their  want  of  emphasis.  But  in  the  Modern  English  i soldiers 
three  the  numeral  has  full  stress. 

1782.  In  Modern  English  postposition  is  regular  in  the 
case  of  cardinal  numerals  used  as  ordinals:  chapter  ten 
[but  the  tenth  chapter^  page  three,  number  three,  latitude  39**, 
in  the  year  1000.  This  usage  seems  to  be  due  to  French 
influence. 

1783.  Also  with  participles  used  as  adjectives :  the  day 
following  [the  following  day],  the  time  being,  the  money  re- 
quired [the  required  money].  This  order  is,  of  course,  the 
result  of  these  words  being  still  felt  to  be  half  verbs. 

1784.  In  Old-English  postposition  is  frequent  in  exclama- 
tions, as  in  Hropgdr  leofa  I  *  dear  Hro]?gar  I '  bropor  mm ! 
t  *  brother  mine ! ' 

1785.  God  (Elmihtig  'God  almighty'  seems  to  be  an 
imitation  of  the  Latin  order  {Deus  omnipotens). 

So  also  the  Modern  English,  the  body  politic,  the  Staies- 
General,  heirs  male  seem  due  to  French  influence. 

1786.  the  -f-  adjectives  follows  proper  names  in  such 
groups  as  Edward  the  First,  William  the  Silent,  parallel 
to    William   the    Conqueror    (1801).      We    find    the    same 


8  SYNTAX.  [§  1787. 

construction  in  Old-English — jElfsidn  se  hleria  *  iElfstan  the 
bald.' 

1787.  In  such  collocations  as  novels  proper  and  novels 
improper  the  postposition  is  emphatic.  In  the  colloquial 
whisky  hot  the  adjective  is  tagged  on  because  it  has  the 
complex  meaning  'made  hot  by  the  addition  of  boiling 
water/ 

1788.  Postposition  is  often  necessary  in  the  case  of 
assumptive  groups :  in  a  manner  the  most  picturesque  \  a  man 
wise  in  his  own  conceit  \  names  well  known  in  literature.  But 
groups  precede  when  pre- order  involves  no  awkwardness  of 
construction,  especially  when  the  group  is  felt  to  be  equivalent 
to  a  single  word,  as  in  he  plays  a  not  very  conspicuous  part  in 
the  story,  or  when  the  group  may  be  regarded  as  a  compound, 
as  in  the  now  declining  day^  his  already  wearied  horse. 

More  than  one  Adjective. 

1789.  When  a  noun  has  more  than  one  modifier,  the 
general  principle  is  that  the  one  most  closely  connected 
with  it  in  meaning  comes  next  to  it,  as  in  the  three  wise 
men,  where  ww^  men  is  equivalent  to  the  single  word  sages. 
Qualifiers  come  before  such  groups,  the  one  that  is  the  most 
special  in  meaning  (three)  coming  next  to  it.  Hence  there  is 
a  gradation  of  increasing  specialization  from  the  beginning 
to  the  end  of  such  a  group  (the,  three,  wise).  In  this 
example  only  one  of  the  modifiers  is  attributive.  In  a  series 
of  attributive  modifiers  the  same  principle  is  generally  ob- 
served, as  in  a  tall  black  man  =  a  tall  negro.  In  bright  blue 
sky  —  brightly  blue  sky  the  position  of  the  first  adjective 
is  partly  due  to  its  being  logically  a  modifier  of  the  second 
one. 

1780.  But  very  frequent  collocations  such  as  old  man, 
young  man  (=. youth)  have  become  so  fixed  that  no  other 
adjective,  even  if  more  special  in  meaning,  is  allowed   to 


§1795.]  WORD^ORDER:  ADJECTIVES,  9 

come   between    the    two   words:    a  conceited  young   man. 
Hence  we  cannot  make  old  sage  into  *old  wise  man. 

1791.  When  the  modifiers  are  about  equally  balanced, 
the  order  may  vary,  as  in  the  two  first  weeks,  the  first  two 
weeks,  and  the  Old-English  on  pam  oprum  prim  dagum 
compared  with  the  Modern  English  in  the  course  of  the 
three  following  days. 

1792.  We  have  seen  that  when  the  articles  are  associated 
with  another  noun-modifier  they  normally  precede  the  latter : 
but  in  some  constructions  they  come  immediately  before  the 
noun.  The  definite  article  does  so  when  associated  with 
certain  general  adjectives  of  quality:  all  the  books,  all  the 
corn,  half  the  day,  treble  the  quantity,  both  the  armies.  Old 
English  sometimes  has  the  same  construction  {ealne  pone 
dcBg),  although  it  generally  prefers  postposition  {pcEtfolc  eall, 
pa  hei  ealle,  pa  h§rgas  begen  (1781).  Old-English  also 
has  the  construction  adjective  +  genitive^  as  in  manige 
(or  feld)  para  manna  *  many  of  the  men/  In  Modern 
English  we  feel  all  the  day  to  be  equivalent  to  the  whole  of 
the  day, 

1793.  The  ind^nite  article  has  the  same  position  in 
combination  with  half— half  an  hour  [but  a  half  loaf] — 
and  in  other  combinations :  many  a  man,  many  a  one,  not 
a  moment  to  lose,  ithe  knight  did  bear  no  less  a  pack. 
Also  in  combination  with  intensitive  adjective-pronouns: 
what  a  pity  I  \  I  never  knew  such  a  man  I  These  words 
naturally  precede  the  a  +  noun  through  being  emphatic. 
In  such  constructions  as  j^  long  a  time,  as  good  a  man  as 
any,  too  good  a  man  the  order  is  the  result  of  avoiding  the 
awkward  collocations  *a  so  long  time,  etc 

1794.  The  construction  with  possessive  pronouns  is 
analogous :  my  old  friend,  but  all  my  time,  half  their  time, 
both  his  eyes. 

1795.  We  also  have  mid-possessive  order  in  ^good  my 
liege  I 


lO  SYNTAX.  [§  1796. 

Genitives, 

1796.  Genitives  always  precede  their  nouns  in  Modern 
English,  which  is  also  the  normal  Old-English  position: 
pees  cyninges  brobor  'the  king's  brother/  on  Godes  naman 
*  in  the  name  of  God.'  The  more  intimate  the  connexion, 
the  more  fixed  this  order  is;  hence  it  is  absolttely  fixed 
in  semi-compounds  such  as  ^ngla-land  '  land  of  the  Angles, 
England/ 

1797.  But  in  Old-English  post-genitives  are  also  frequent, 
especially  in  combination  with  quantitative  words  and  groups, 
as  in  manige  para  sekstena  cyninges  begna  '  many  of  the  best 
king's  thanes/  where  the  last  two  words  form  a  semi-com- 
pound, mtcel  dctl  para  burgwara  *  a  considerable  portion 
of  the  citizens/  Also  in  combination  with  preposition- 
groups,  as  in  on  neawiste  pare  byrig  *in  the  neighbourhood 
of  the  city,'  on  twa  healfa  pmre  te  *on  both  sides  of  the 
river';  here  it  is  the  result  of  avoiding  such  constructions 
as  on  pare  byrig  neawiste^  where  there  is  separation  of  the 
elements  of  the  preposition-group,  although  such  construc- 
tions do  occur. 

Modifying  Nouns. 

1798.  In  Old-English  modifying  nouns  follow  their  head- 
word, as  in  jElfred  cyning  '  king  Alfred,*  Eadgdr  cepeling 
'prince  Edgar/  except  when  the  modifier  is  emphatic,  as 
in  midel  pcBS  folces  ofer  sa  d-drafdony  buton  pam  cyninge 
jElfrede  *  (the  Danes)  drove  many  of  the  people  over  the 
sea,  except  the  king,  Alfred/  It  is  to  be  observed  that 
in  JE,lfred  cyning  the  adjunct-noun  is  subordinated  to  the 
proper  name  not  only  in  position  but  also  in  stress. 

1799.  In  Modern  English  the  modifier  comes  first ;  king 
Alfred^  Mr.  Smithy  Dr.  Tanner,  Farmer  Hughes,  Brother 
Jonathan,  Friend  Mill.  This  change  of  order  seems  to 
be  due  simply  to  the  analogy  of  the  pre-position  of  ad- 
jectives and  other  noun-modifiers,  the  adjunct-noun  keeping, 


§i8o4.]  WORD-ORDER:   PRONOUNS,  II 

however,  its  weak  stress  {-h'ng   Alfred),   which  would   be 
impossible  in  Old-English. 

1800.  The  articles  may  precede  the  adjunct-noun  ex- 
ceptionally in  a  Mr.  Smith  etc.,  and  regularly  in  such 
collocations  as  the  angel  Gabriel^  the  emperor  Maximilian ; 
so  also  possessives,  as  in  my  friend  Smith. 

1801.  But  when  the  adjunct-noun  has  a  strongly  specia- 
lizing function,  it  follows  its  head-word  in  Modern  as  well 
as  Old  English,  being  preceded  by  the  definite  article, 
as  in  William  the  Conqueror,  fohn  the  Baptist  compared 
with  the  angel  Gabriel,  there  being  only  one  '  Baptist,' 
while  there  are  supposed  to  be  many  angels.  In  Mr.  Smith 
the  bookseller  we  have  both  positions  of  adjunct-nouns. 
In  /,  fohn  Smith,  he  (the  speaker)  said  .  .  the  post- 
position is  inevitable;  so  also  in  Edward,  Prince  of  Wales 
compared  with  Prince  Edward, 

Pronouns. 

The  position  of  pronouns  has  been  incidentally  dealt  with 
under  that  of  nouns  and  adjectives. 

1802.  The  Old-English  postposition  of  quantitative  ad- 
jectives (i  781)  is  still  preserved  in  combination  with  pronouns : 
are  they  all  gone  ?  \  we  thank  you  both  \  the  awkwardness  of 
our  (or  us)  both  addressing  the  same  lady.  But  these  words 
necessarily  precede  possessives,  except  in  constructions  such 
as  that  in  the  last  example :  both  his  eyes,  \  to  frustrate  both 
their  hopes. 

1803.  Adjectives  modifying  indefinite  noun-pronouns  follow 
them,  as  in  something  bad,  anything  good  [compared  with  any 
good  thing'],  nothing  remarkable)  similarly  in  anything  else. 
If  the  adjective  precedes,  they  become  pure  nouns  :  in 
her  manner  there  was  an  indefinite  something. 

1804.  myself  etc.  follow  noun-pronouns  in  the  same 
way :  he  himself  says  so.  Broken  order  is  more  emphatic : 
/  will  see  about  it  myself 


12  SYNTAX,  [§  1805. 

Verbs. 

1805.  As  regards  the  position  of  the  verb  in  the  sentence, 
it  is  to  be  observed  that  some  subordinate  words — con- 
junctions and  adverbs — always  take  precedence,  such  as 
and  and  the  Old-English  ne  *not/  Hence  in  sentences 
beginning  with  and  or  ne  +  verb,  the  verb  is  practically 
initial. 

Verb  +  Subject. 

1806.  (a)  In  interrogative  sentences  (1771) :  are  you 
ready  ?  \  where  is  he  ? 

(l>)  In  imperative  sentences,  where,  however,  the  pro- 
noun is  generally  omitted.  In  Old-English  it  is  added 
regularly  in  negative  sentences,  where  the  verb  necessarily 
precedes  the  pronoun  through  being  attracted  by  the  ne 
(1807):  ne  heo  ge  bitere  I  *be  (ye)  not  bitter!'  The 
postposition  of  the  pronoun  in  positive  sentences,  as  in 
cume  gel  for  the  more  usual  cumaj? !  *come  (ye)!',  seems 
to  be  due  partly  to  the  analogy  of  the  negative  con- 
struction, pardy  to  the  feeling  that  the  pronoun  is  a  tag. 
When  the  pronoun  is  added  in  Modern  English,  it  follows 
the  verb  in  negative  sentences — do  not  {you)  do  that  1 — 
while  in  positive  sentences  it  generally  precedes  the  verb 
in  the  spoken  language :  {you)  let  that  dog  alone !  \  never 
{you)  mind! 

Pre- verb  order  occurs  already  in  Old-English :  /«  soplice  cyp 
line  gesihpe !  *  do  thou  make  known  thy  vision  !  * 

{c)  In  non-imperative  sentences  expressing  wish  or  com- 
mand: may  I  be  hanged  I  \  perish  India  I  In  so  be  it  I 
the  verb  is  attracted  by  the  so  (1810).  This  inversion  is 
avoided  in  the  case  of  transitive  verbs  because  of  the 
ambiguity  that  would  arise :  God  forbid !  |  God  save  the 
Queen  I  Both  orders  are  also  found  in  Old-English.  These 
sentences  evidently  follow  the  analogy  of  imperative  sentences. 


§i8ia.]  WORD-ORDER:     VERBS  13 

{d)  In  sentences  of  condition  nare  [=  ne  ware]  sio  ^dsf- 
Hie  getacnung  *  were  it  not  for  the  spiritual  meaning '  |  were 
Richard  mine,  his  power  were  mine  \  were  he  my  brother  = 
*  even  if  he  were  my  brother.' 

So  also  in  sentences  of  alternative  hypothesis  :  wyle  he^  nyle 
\=.ne  wile]  he  *  whether  he  will  or  not,  willy-mlly.' 

After  Front  Words. 

1807.  In  Old-English  certain  adverbs  draw  the  verb  after 
them,  so  that  it  precedes  its  subject.  This  is  always  the 
case  with  ne,  as  in  ne  mceg  id  pcei  don  *  I  cannot  do  that ' 
compared  with  ic  mceg  pcet  don. 

1808.  Generally  also  with  such  adverbs  as /5  *then//<jr 
'there,'  which  serve  to  connect  the  sentence  they  introduce 
with  what  precedes :  pa  feng  Alfred  to  ride  '  then  Alfred 
succeeded  to  the  throne '  |  and  par  wearp  se  cyning  ofslcBgen 
'  and  there  the  king  was  killed '  |  andpcssymd  twegen  monap 
gefeahi  se  cyning  wip  pone  h§re  '  and  two  months  after  that 
the  king  fought  with  the  (Danish)  army/ 

1809.  The  connective  force  of  this  order  is  shown  by  its 
occasional  occurrence  after  the  conjunction  and:  and  pat  is 
peah  swipe  cBdig  ;  and  lie  gap  wilde  moras  wip  eastan  '  and  it 
(the  country)  is  very  rocky;  and  wild  moors  lie  eastwards 
(of  it).' 

1810.  But  even  in  Old-English  there  are  many  exceptions, 
and  Modern  English  generally  has  the  normal  order  subject 
+  verb,  although  inversion  still  occurs  even  in  the  spoken 
language :  nor  do  I  \  so  do  I  \  now  comes  the  amusing  part  of 
the  story. 

1811.  Verb-inversion  is  sometimes  caused  by  a  preceding 
dependent  clause  both  in  Old-English  and  Modern  literary 
English  :  not  as  the  world  gives,  give  I  unto  you.  Here  also 
it  is  evidently  connective. 

1812.  Verb-inversion  in  appended  or  parenthetic  clauses 
of  statement  is  also  connective ;  yes^  said  the  boy  \  yes,  said 


14  '  SYNTAX,  [§1813. 

he,  I  will  I  what,  said  he,  do  you  want  ?  With  t  quoth  he, 
whose  verb  is  used  only  in  this  construction,  the  order  is 
invariable,  but  with  other  verbs  pre-subject  order  also  occurs : 
my  son,  my  son  I  he  cried,  they  have  murdered  him  !  So  also 
in  Old-English  he  cwcBp  is  used  in  the  appended  as  well  as 
the  front-position  instead  of  cwcbJ>  he. 

In  vulgar  English  the  inversion  occurs  also  in  front  clauses : 
says  he,  what  do  you  want  f 

1813.  In  Modern  literary  English  connective  verb-inversion 
is  frequent  in  dependent  sentences  as  well :  Death  itself  is 
not  so  painful  as  is  this  sudden  horror  \  Ruppin,  where  lies  the 
greater  part  of  the  regiment  \  a  cottage  in  which  lived  the  widow 
of  a  former  curate  \  what  were  his  thoughts  I  cannot  tell.  This 
is  a  complete  reversal  of  Old-English  tendencies  (1776). 

1814.  Another  kind  of  verb-inversion  is  that  caused  by 
emphatic  or  exceptional  front-position  of  other  classes  of 
words.  This  is  frequent  with  adverbs  and  adverb-groups, 
as  in  the  following  examples,  where  the  inversion  is  obliga- 
tory :  scarcely  had  I  sat  down,  when  . .  \  not  till  then  did  /. .  | 
to  such  straits  were  they  reduced  that .  .  Examples  with  other 
parts  of  speech  are :  enclosed  is  a  letter  \  the  greater  their 
power,  the  greater  seems  their  revenge  \  ^high  sparks  of  honour 
in  thee  have  I  found.  Here  also  the  inversion  is  often  obliga- 
tory ;  such  a  construction  as  *  enclosed  a  letter  is  would  make 
the  is  too  emphatic  (1766).  In  other  cases  the  inversion  is 
exceptional,  as  in  how  foolish  was  It  where  Wd!j=(w9z), 
not  (woz),  which  would  make  the  sentence  into  a  question. 
Even  in  Old-English  front  order  does  not  necessarily  cause 
inversion  unless  connectiveness  is  implied  at  the  same  time. 

1815.  In  such  phrases  as  here  is  your  hat  I  \  there  goes  the 
richest  man  in  England  I,  compared  with  here  heist  \  there  he 
goes  I,  the  inversion  is  fixed,  because  the  adverb  is  felt  to 
be  a  substitute  for  a  subject-word,  here  is  your  hat  being 
equivalent  to  this  is  your  hat.     This  construction  is  especially 


§i82i.]  WORD-ORDER:     VERBS.  15 

frequent  with  the  weak  there :  there  is  no  more  bread  \  there 
lived  a  man. 

1816.  In  the  formal,  elliptical  style  of  public  notices  the 
verb  is  put  first  for  emphasis  in  such  phrases  as  died  on 
the  14th.  Similarly  in  periphrastic  tenses,  with  omission  of 
the  verb :  to  be  sold,  a  desirable  family  residence. 

1817.  Otherwise  front  verbs  occur  only  in  poetry :  smiled 
then,  well  pleased,  the  aged  man  (Scott).  With  a  verb  which 
is  wholly,  or  partly,  transitive,  as  in  shook  all  the  hollow  caves^ 
this  construction  is  hable  to  cause  ambiguity. 

Modifier  +  Verb. 

1818.  A  verb  regularly  follows  instead  of  preceding  its 
modifier  when  that  modifier  is  a  relative  or  conjunctive  word, 
as  \nyou  are  the  man  whom  I  want  \  I  know  where  he  is. 

1819.  Verbs  also  regularly  follow  exclamatory  words :  how 
he  boasts  !  |  what  a  strong  man  he  is  ! 

The  original  Arian  post-verb  order  is  also  preserved  in 
some  cases  in  Old-English  in  independent  as  well  as  de- 
pendent sentences  (1776). 

1820.  Thus  pronouns  generally  precede  the  verb,  as  in 
he  hine gefeng  'he  took  him  prisoner,'  hie  begeaton  welan  and 
us  lafdon  *  they  acquired  wealth  and  left  (it)  to  us,'  compared 
with  he  gefeng  pone  cyning.  So  also  with  adverbs :  he  pa  swa 
dyde  '  he  then  did  so,'  hie  par  wunodon  '  they  dwelt  there.* 
These  words  have  evidently  kept  their  original  position 
through  being  unemphatic.  This  order  is  only  poetical  in 
Modern  English  :  the  serpent  me  beguiled. 

1821.  Even  full  nouns  occasionally  have  the  same  position, 
as  in  he  par  sige  nam  *  he  gained  the  victory  there.'  Here — 
as  also  to  some  extent  in  the  preceding  examples — the  two 
words  form  a  sort  of  compound,  sige  :nam  being  parallel  to 
bi'Standan,  -hine  gefeng  to  be'cuman  (740).  This  order  is 
especially  frequent  in  sentences  introduced  by  and\  pa  ridon 
hie  hider  .  .  ,  and  pone  CBpeling  on  pare  hyrig  melton.     If  the 


l6  SYNTAX.  [§ 

second  sentence  came  first  in  a  group  of  sentences,  the  end- 
verb  order  would  be  impossible,  as  being  too  abrupt.  But 
even  in  the  earliest  Old -English  verbs  of  weak  meaning  such 
as  *  have '  and  '  be '  always  follow  the  Modern  order,  keeping 
as  close  as  possible  to  their  subjects,  as  in  hcB/de  stge  '  had 
the  victory,'  compared  with  stge  nam  \  he  wees  twelf  niht  mid 
p&m  cyninge^  and  he  hine  miclum  and  his  geferan  mid  feo 
weorpode  *  he  was  twelve  days  with  the  king,  and  he  honoured 
him  and  his  companion  greatly  with  money/ 

1822.  We  still  preserve  post- verb  order  in  ime  thinks 
through  the  analogy  of  /  think. 

Several  Verb-Modifiers. 

1823.  Datives  precede  accusatives:  he gesealde  his  hreper 
heal/  his  rice  '  he  gave  his  brother  half  his  kingdom/  So 
also  in  Modern  English  a  datival  noun  or  pronoun  precedes 
an  accusatival  noun,  as  in  he  showed  me  his  pictures  [in  Old- 
English  a  dative  pronoun  precedes  the  verb,  §  1820] ;  but  if 
both  are  pronouns,  the  accusatival  pronoun  precedes :  give  it 
me  I  [Old-English :  s^le  me  hit  /]. 

1824.  Object-complements  naturally  follow  the  object- 
word  :  they  made  him  king  \  to  call  people  bad  names  \  to  paint 
a  house  white  \  \\his  crimes  make  guilty  all  his  sons\.  So 
also  if  the  complement  is  a  verbal :  /  saw  him  come  \  I  want 
him  to  come  \  I  saw  him  coming  \  I  saw  it  done  \  excuse  me 
interrupting  you. 

Verbals  and  Periphrastic  Verbs. 

1825.  Verbals  are  followed  by  their  modifiers  in  the  same 
way  as  the  verbs  they  are  formed  from :  i^e  saw  him)  giving 
a  beggar  some  money. 

For  the  *  split  infinitive '  see  §  1864. 

1826:  In  Old-English  a  finite  verb  in  combination  with 
verbals  has  the  same  freedom  of  position  as  a  simple  verb, 


§  1830.]  WORD-ORDER  :    VERBALS,  I7 

being  generally  put  at  the  end  of  a  dependent  sentence: 
/fd  hi  geseah  fxBt  he  oferwunnen  beon  wolde  *  when  he  saw 
that  he  was  going  to  be  conquered/  In  independent 
sentences  the  tendency  is  to  put  the  verbal  at  the  end :  pa 
opre  wcBron  hungre  d'cwolen  '  the  others  had  died  of  hunger '  | 
vianige  cupon  fnglisd  gewrit  d'rcedan  'many  could  read 
English  writing/  It  is  to  be  noticed  that  in  such  sentences 
as  hie  hcef don  pone  cyning  o/slcBgenne  (later:  o/slcEgen)  'they 
had  killed  the  king '  the  verbal  comes  after  the  noun  because 
it  originally  stood  in  apposition  to  it.  In  Old-English 

end-verb  order  in  independent  sentences  is  frequent  in 
periphrastic  forms  composed  of  participles  and  'have'  or 
'be/  but  only  in  joined-on  sentences  in  accordance  with 
§  1822  :  and  hie  pa  ymb  pa  gatu  feohtende  war  on  oppcet .  . 
'  and  they  fought  round  the  gates  until  .  / 

1827.  In  Modern  English,  on  the  other  hand,  there  is 
a  tendency  to  make  the  elements  of  a  periphrastic  form 
into  a  compact  group,  whose  modifiers  follow  it  in  the  same 
way  as  they  follow  a  simple  verb:  I-shall-have-written  my 
letter.  But  many  adverbs  are  freely  inserted :  /  do  not  know  \ 
I  have  never  seen  it. 

1828.  In  Modern  English  the  elements  of  a  periphrastic 
form  follow  each  other  in  a  fixed  order,  which  is  rarely 
departed  from  even  in  poetry :  a  strong  tyrant  who  invaded 
has  our  land  (Spenser).  But  emphatic  front-position  of  the 
uifinitive  is  not  unfrequent:  ifor  die  I  shall! 

1829.  The  order  of  the  verbals  in  periphrastic  verb-forms 
is  the  natural  result  of  their  development.  The  finite  peri- 
phrastic verb  shows  the  following  orders : — 

pres.  partic.  (  +  pret.  partic.) 
infin.  +  -  pret.  partic.  f  +  pres.  partic.  (-hpret.  partic.) 
auxil.  +  ^  I  I  -f-  pret.  partic. 

pres.  partic.  +  pret.  partic. 
pret.  partic. -f- pres.  partic.  (  +  pret.  partic.) 

1830.  It  will  be  observed  that  the  infinitive  occurs  only 
VOL.  u.  c 


l8  SYNTAX.  [§  1831. 

as  the  first  of  a  group  of  verbals,  the  other  places  being 
filled  up  exclusively  by  participles,  which  may  also  take  the 
place  of  the  infinitive  itself. 

1831.  The  periphrastic  infinitives  always  begin  with  the 
supine ;  they  have  the  same  forms  as  the  finite  verb  as  far 
as  their  verbal-elements  are  concerned. 

1832.  The   periphrastic   (present)  participle  and  gerund 

has  only  the  order  pres.  partic.  +  pret.  partic.  in  common 

with  the  finite  forms ;  it  has  in  addition  the  following  forms : — 

f  pjes.  partic.  ( +  pret.  partic.) 
pres.  partic+pret.  partic.  +  ]  ^^^^  ^^^.^ 

All  periphrastic  participles  begin  with  pres.  partic.  +  pret. 
partic. 

Adverbs. 

1833.  Adverbs  modify  so  many  different  parts  of  speech — 
besides  modifying  groups  and  sentences — that  their  position 
varies  greatly.  They  show,  indeed,  almost  the  last  remains 
of  normal  free  order  in  Modern  English. 

For  dependent  adverbs  see  §  1858. 

Adverbs  +  Nominals  or  Adverbs. 

1834.  In  accordance  with  general  principles,  adverbs 
precede  adjectives,  adverbs,  and  adverb-groups :  very  quick^  not 
so,  quite  in-the-wrong.  So  also  adverb-groups  precede  under 
the  same  circumstances :  not-at-all  sorry,  not-at-all  in-the- 
wrong. 

1835.  The  adverb  enough,  like  the  adjective  enough,  can 
either  precede  or  follow  its  head-word  in  the  earlier  Modem 
as  well  as  Old  English,  but  in  the  present  English  it  can 
only  follow :  good  enough,  quickly  enough.  In  Old-English 
it  may  follow  adjectives,  as  in  sweti genog  'sweet  enough,' 
but  generally  precedes  adverbs,  as  in  genog  georne  witan 
*  know  well  enough,  know  quite  well/ 

1836.  An  adverb  immediately  preceding  a  noun  is  in- 


§i84i.]  WORD-ORDER:   ADVERBS,  IQ 

distinguishable  from  an  adjective,  as  in  the  then  state  of 
affairs.  But  an  adverb  before  a  group-noun — even  if  the 
group  consists  only  of  article  +  noun — still  remains  an  adverb, 
although,  of  course,  it  approaches  in  meaning  to  an  adjective, 
as  in  qiMe  the  gentleman^  not  at  all  a  lady,  fully  master  of  the 
subject, 

1837.  In  some  constructions  adverbs  follow  their  nouns, 
standing-to  them  in  a  kind  of  loose  apposition,  as  in  the  man 
there=*  the  man  standing  there'  or  'the  man  who  is  there/ 
one  more  =  *  one  in  addition.'  The  connexion  is  still  looser 
in  such  constructions  as  to  permeate  space  generally. 

Verb  +  Adverb.  ^ 

1838.  In  accordance  with  general  principles  adverbs  and 
adverb-groups  generally  follow  verbs:  come  in  \  let  us  go 
now  I  I-shall'have- finished  in-a  few-minutes. 

1839.  not  always  follows  a  simple  verb,  but  with  peri- 
phrastic forms  and  verbals  it  has  the  same  position  as  verb- 
preceding  adverbs,  that  is,  it  follows  immediately  after  the 
auxiliary  instead  of  coming  at  the  end  of  the  periphrastic 
form — as  in  /  shall  not  go  \^:he  will  want  not  our  help],  do 
not  go!  compared  with  I  will  not  \  igo  not! — and  precedes 
supines  and  other  verbals,  as  in  to  be  or  not  to  be,  that  is  the 
question  \  not  knowing  what  else  to  do,  I  came  home. 

1840.  If  the  verb  has  other  modifiers  more  intimately 
connected  with  it,  these  precede  the  verb-following  adverb ; 
this  is  especially  the  case  if  the  other  modifiers  are  logical 
predicates  (/  am  ready  now),  or  objects,  as  in  ask  him  again  ! 

1841.  All  adverbs — whatever  their  position  may  be  in 
other  cases — necessarily  follow  interrogative  verbs;  but,  as 
a  general  rule,  they  do  not  follow  the  verb  itself,  but  the 
accompanying  pronoun:  is  he  here?  j  is  he  never  ready  in 
time?  If  the  verb  is  periphrastic,  the  adverb  comes  at  the 
end  of  the  group:  shall  we  go  now?  But  not  comes 
immediately  after  either  the  verb  itself — in  which  case  there 

C  2 


20  SYNTAX,  ^  [§1842. 

is  always  contraction  in  the  spoken  language — or  the  accom- 
panying pronoun,  in  which  case  there  is  no  contraction :  is 
not  (iznt)  he  here  ?  \  is  he  not  here  ?  \  shall  not  (Jaant)  we  go 
now?  I  shall  we  not  go  now?  The  second  order  is  preferred 
in  writing,  except  m  reproductions  of  colloquial  speech, 
where  the  contracted  forms  are  generally  written  (w«7, 
shan't).  The  second  order  occurs  only  occasionally  in 
speech. 

1842.  In  a  succession  of  adverbs  and  adverb-groups 
those  most  intimately  connected  with  the  verb  precede: 
come  up  at  once  1  \  we  went  to  school  together  \  I  want  to 
look  about  me  a  little. 

1843.  When  a  verb  is  followed  by  an  object-word  and  an 
adverb,  the  order  of  these  is  sometimes  doubtful,  as  in 
/  have  brought  back  your  umbrella  or  /  have  brought  your 
umbrella  back.  In  such  a  sentence  as  bring  in  some  more 
coals!  the  adverb  generally  precedes.  But  the  general 
tendency  is  to  put  the  object  first ;  in  some  cases,  indeed, 
no  other  order  is  allowable,  as  in  let  him  in  I  \  I  have  left 
my  umbrella  behind.  The  reason  appears  to  be  that  the 
adverb  might  be  mistaken  for  a  preposition,  if  put  before 
the  noun-word. 

1844.  If  several  adverbs  follow  without  being  specially 
connected  with  the  verb,  time-adverbs  generally  come  first : 
he  has  altered  a  good  deal  lately  \  we  expect  him  home  again 
to-morrow^  where,  however,  again  seems  to  be  specially 
associated  with  the  verb,  forming  with  it  a  kind  of  com- 
pound. If  again  is  detached  by  end-position,  it  becomes 
emphatic,  as  in  to  get  back  to  civilization  again  compared 
with  to  get  back  again  to  civilization.  So  also  in  he  is  there 
still  compared  with  he  is  still  there, 

1845.  When  one  of  two  modifiers  is  a  lengthy  group,  the 
shorter  verb-modifier  is  often  allowed  to  precede  even  if 
it  would  otherwise  follow,  as  in  he  heard  again  the  language 
of  his  nursery  [he  heard  it  again]  ^  I  met  him  last  night  at 


§1847.]  WORD-ORDER:  ADVERBS.  Hi 

a  party  at  Mrs.  Carter  s  [/  met  him  there  last  night].  In 
such  cases  it  is  felt  that  the  heavier  modifier  will  easier 
bear  separation  from  the  verb. 

Adverb  +  Verb. 

1846.  An  adverb  which  precedes  a  simple  verb  also  pre- 
cedes the  supine  and  other  verbals — misfortunes  never  come 
single  I  I  hope  never  to  see  his  face  again  \  the  thought  of  never 
seeing  him  again — and  follow  auxiliaries  and  the  unem- 
phatic  is :  /  have  never  spoken  to  him  \  I  should  never  have 
thought  of  that  |  he  is  never  ready  in  time.  But  if  these  verbs 
are  emphatic  or  detached,  the  adverb  precedes  them :  he 
never  'is  ready  in  time!  \  I  never  have  spoken  to  him,  and  hope 
I  never  shall. 

Weak  have  (not  auxiliary)  and  the  link-verbs  take  the  adverb 
before  them  :  he  never  has  any  money  \  he  never  gets  ready  in 
time.  Note  that  *he  has  never  would  in  speech  be  contracted 
(hijz  nevd),  which  would  suggest  he  is. 

1847.  When  an  adverb  is  put  before  instead  of  after 
a  verb,  it  ceases  to  modify  the  verb  exclusively,  but  modifies 
also  the  whole  group  of  words  connected  with  the  verb,  as  in 
/  certainly  think  so  compared  with  /  think  so  certainly  (364) 
I  /  hardly  think  we  want  afire  compared  with  to  think  hardly 
of  a  person^  where  the  change  of  position  completely  changes 
the  meaning  of  the  adverb.  So  also  gladly  in  I  gladly  acceded 
to  his  request  means  *  I  was  glad  to  (accede  to  .  .),'  while  in 
I  acceded  to  his  request  gladly  it  means  simply  '  with  gladness.' 
So  also  if  we  made  he  generally  failed  to  explain  his  meaning 
into  he  failed  to  explain  his  meaning  generally,  the  adverb 
would  modify  explain  only,  and  the  meaning  would  be  '  he 
succeeded  only  partially  in  explaining  his  meaning.'  Other 
examples  are :  Wednesday  came,  and  luckily  it  was  a  fine  day, 
where  luckily  =  *  it  was  lucky  that  .  .'  |  /  cannot  begin  my 
work  again  when  I  have  once  been  interrupted  compared  with 
interrupted  once. 


22  SYNTAX.  [§1848. 

1848.  Another  result  of  this  is  that  a  verb-preceding  adverb 
is  often  vaguer  in  meaning  than  a  verb-following  one.  Thus 
while  the  end-adverb  in  /  understand  you  perfectly  has  its 
literal  meaning,  it  tends  to  become  a  mere  expletive  in  such 
sentences  as  I  perfectly  appreciate  the  delicacy  oj  your  position. 
So  also  in  the  last  example  of  the  preceding  paragraph. 

1849.  As  the  pre-adverb  order  tends  to  distribute  the  mean- 
ing of  the  adverb  (1847),  it  sometimes  has  the  same  effect  as 
front-order  often  has  (1854),  that  is,  it  tends  to  give  it  a  depen- 
dent meaning,  so  that  it  seems  to  refer  back  to  what  pre- 
cedes. This  is  clearly  seen  in  many  adverbs  of  time,  which, 
when  they  precede  their  verbs,  suggest  the  idea  of  sequence 
as  opposed  to  that  of  an  isolated  event,  as  in  I  now  proceed  to 
explain  .  .  compared  with  I  proceed  to  explain  now,  where  now 
means  *  at  the  present  moment.*  So  also  in  he  afterwards 
became  a  schoolmaster  \  we  then  went  on  to  Rome^  where  then  is 
parallel  in  meaning  to  the  initial  connective  adverb-group  in 
the  next  day  we  . .  [contrast :  he  came  on  Monday ^  and  went 
away  again  the  next  day], 

1850.  Adverbs  are  often  put  before  instead  of  after  parti- 
ciples in  periphrastic  forms  as  if  the  participle  were  an  adjec- 
tive, as  in  he  has  been  very  kindly  treated 'mste3.d  of  the  normal 
he  has  been  treated  very  kindly  \  it  is  very  well  done  [he  will  do 
it  very  well]. 

1851.  The  adverb  never  always  precedes  its  verb :  never 
mind!  So  also  the  synonymous  hardly  ever :  /  hardly  ever 
see  him  now.  Several  other  adverbs  of  time  also  show  a 
strong  preference  for  pre-order,  especially  the  corresponding 
always :  he  always  dines  at  the  same  place  [he  dines  there  con- 
stantly], I  often  see  him  at  the  theatre  \  it  rarely  happens  that. . 
With  all  of  these  post-  or  end-  order  is  much  less  frequent. 

1862.  The  pre-order  of  the  intensitive  quite  (I  quite  agree 
with  you)  seems  to  be  fixed. 

1853.  We  have  lastly  to  note  the  illogical  pre-order  of  only 
in  such  sentences  as  I  only  want  sixpence-^  I  want  only  sixpence 


§  i857.]  WORD-ORDER :  SENTENCE-WORDS.  23 

or  /  want  sixpence  only.  The  hesitation  between  these  last 
two  orders  was  probably  the  reason  for  preferring  pre-order, 
which  was  of  course  originally  emphatic,  /  want  only  sixpence 
implying  *  all  I  want  is — I  want  nothing  more  than — 
sixpence/ 

Front  Adverbs. 

1864.  Front-adverb  position  often  suggests  the  idea  of 
dependence  on  what  precedes,  as  in  the  next  day  zve  went  on 
to  Rome  (1849).  So  also  in  here  he  stopped  short  in  his 
speech  \  they  used  to  be  quite  common,  and  now  they  are  quite 
rare.  This  order  is  not  emphatic ;  in  fact,  if  we  wished  to 
make  the  now  of  the  last  sentence  emphatic,  we  should  put  it 
at  the  end :  they  are  quite  rare  now. 

1855.  But  in  some  cases  front-position  seems  to  express — 
or  at  any  rate  to  accompany — emphasis  on  an  adverb,  and  in 
'now  we  are  ojff  at  last!  compared  with  /  am  going  mow 
[/  am  going  'now  with  a  different  kind  of  emphasis  from  that 
of  the  first  sentence],  'certainly  I  think  so  \  of  'course  I  shall 
\he  said  it  of  '.course  without  thinking\  after  'all,  it  does  not 
matter  I  The  front-order  in  here  we  are  !  there  he  goes!  seems 
also  to  be  emphatic. 

Sentence-words. 

1856.  Sentence-words  and  sentence-groups  used  as  voca- 
tives and  imperatives  are  very  free  as  regards  their  position 
in  the  sentence,  front-position  being  generally  emphatic,  as  in 
' sir f  you  are  mistaken  I  compared  mihyes,-sir  /  \  please  do  it 
again  I  compared  with  half  a  cup,  please!  \  thank  you,  I  would 
rather  not!  compared  with  no,  thank  you.  But  An  yes,  please, 
the  please  may  be  emphatic,  because,  2Lsyes  is  also  a  sentence- 
word,  please  itself  may  be  regarded  as  beginning — or  rather, 
constituting — a  new  sentence. 

1867.  Interjections  are  generally  emphatic,  and  therefore 
prefer  front-order. 


24  SYNTAX,  '  [§  1858. 

Conjunctions  and  Dependent  Adverbs. 

1858.  Conjunctions,  being  connective  words,  naturally 
come  at  the  beginning  of  the  sentence  they  join  on. 

1869.  When  a  pure  conjunction  and  a  half-conjunction 
or  sentence-adverb  come  together,  the  conjunction  naturally 
precedes  in  most  cases — always  in  the  case  of  such  conjunc- 
tions as  andy  hut,  which  never  occur  except  initially:  hut, 
nevertheless,  .  .  With  some  conjunctions  the  order  is 
indifferent :  t/,  on  the  other  hand,  .  .  \  on  the  other  hand^  if . . 

Broken  Order. 

1860.  Broken  order  is  very  frequent  in  Old-English.  When 
two  or  more  co-ordinate  words  ought  to  precede  a  word  which 
they  jointly  modify  or  are  modified  by,  there  is  a  tendency  to 
avoid  suspensiveness  by  putting  only  one  of  them  before 
this  word,  and  letting  the  others  follow  in  tag-order:  swipe 
midle  m^ras  fersce  '  very  large  fresh-water  lakes '  |  Cyne- 
wulf  henam  Sigehryht  his  rues  and  Wesiseaxna  witan 
'  Cynewulf  and  the  West-Saxon  senators  deprived  Sigebryht 
of  his  kingdom'  \ges(Et poet  land  and ged&lde  'occupied  the 
country  and  divided  it '  |  het  gewyrdan  dne  burg  pckr  on  nea- 
wiste  and  gemannian  *  ordered  a  fort  to  be  built  and  garrisoned 
in  the  neighbourhood.'  Of  course,  if  the  whole  group  is  very 
short,  or  if  the  two  words  are  closely  connected  in  meaning, 
or  if  one  of  them  is  of  subordinate  force,  there  is  no  break : 
and  he  him/eoh  andfeorh  gehead  '  he  offered  them  money  and 
their  lives '  |  an  berenfell '  one  bear's  skin.' 

1861.  In  some  cases  Old-English  broken  order  is  the 
result  of  the  second  word  being  in  apposition,  as  if  it  were 
tagged  on  by  a  relative  sentence:  hi  hce/de  tamra  deora 
unhehohtra  siex  hund  '  he  had  six  hundred  tame  reindeer  un- 
sold.' In  such  cases  the  tag- order  is  preserved  in  Modern 
English  as  well. 

1862.  Old-English  makes  a  free  use  of  broken  order  in 


§i866.]  WORD-ORDER:    CROSS-ORDER.  25 

Other  cases  as  well.  In  such  a  sentence  as  pa  cyningas  pe 
pone  anweald  hce/don  pCBs  folces  onpCBm  dagum  '  the  kings  who 
had  the  rule  of  the  people  in  those  days '  the  break  between 
anweald  and  its  genitive  is  to  avoid  making  hcefdon  too 
emphatic.  In  pat  hira  ne  mihte  nan  to  qprum  *  so  that  none 
of  them  could  come  to  the  others  '  it  is  the  result  of  the  front- 
position  of  h'ra,  which  is  put  immediately  before  the  verb 
because  it  is  logically  equivalent  to  *  they.'  The  end-position 
of  verbs  and  verbals  often  causes  broken  order,  as  in  bd  opre 
waron  hungre  d'cwolene  *  the  others  had  died  of  hunger.* 

1863.  Modern  English  is  much  more  tolerant  of  suspen- 
siveness,  and  the  logical  spirit  of  the  language  makes  it 
averse  to  broken  order.  The  Old-English  order  adjective  4- 
noun  +  adjective  survives  only  in  such  isolated  phrases  as 
good  men  and  true.  Breaks  caused  by  emphatic  end  or 
front  order,  such  as  bars  and  bolts  we  have  none  \  of  fuel  they 
had  plenty,  belong  only  to  the  literary  language. 

1864.  But  there  is  one  kind  of  break  which  is  unknown 
in  Old-English,  and  is  mainly  of  Modern  English  growth  - 
the  so-called  '  split-infinitive ' — that  is,  the  supine  with  a  word 
or  words  coming  between  the  to  and  the  verbal,  as  in  it  is 
necessary  to  clearly  understand  this  point  instead  of  the  more 
usual  it  is  necessary  to  understand  this  point  clearly. 

Cross-order. 

1865.  When  two  word-groups  or  sentences  of  similar 
construction  follow  each  other,  they  may,  in  a  language 
which  has  free  order,  be  either  in  parallel  order  (anaphora) 
or  cross  order  (chiasmus).  Thus  in  Latin  we  have  parallel 
order  in  alio  loco,  alio  tempore  *  in  another  place,  at  another 
time,*  cross-order  in  multos  defendi  laest  neminem  *I  have 
defended  many,  injured  none.' 

1866.  Cross-order  occurs  in  Old-English,  as  in  pcet  land 
is  eall  wisie,  butan  on  feawum  stdwum  styccemdlum  wlciap 
FinnaSf  on  huniope  on  wintra^  and  on  sumera  on  fisdope  be 


26  SYNTAX.  [§1867. 

p&re  sa  *the  country  is  all  desert,  except  that  in  a  few 
places  Fins  dwell  piecemeal,  (being  engaged)  in  hunting  in 
winter  and  fishing  by  the  sea  in  summer.'  Here  it  is  the 
result  of  on  sumera  being  attracted  by  the  similar  group  on 
wintra.  This  probably  is  the  origin  of  the  construction, 
although  in  higher  stages  of  development  it  was  used  for 
emphasis  and  rhetorical  effect. 

Front-order. 

1867.  As  we  have  seen,  front-order  is  normal  in  the  case 
of  conjunctions  and  other  particles  (1858),  of  interrogative 
and  exclamatory  words  (1771),  and  of  verbs  in  interrogative 
sentences  (1806).  In  some  of  these  cases  the  front-order  is 
emphatic,  in  others  connective.  We  have  also  considered 
more  exceptional  cases  of  front-verb  order  (1811  foil.)  and 
front-adverb  order  (1864).  Other  exceptional  cases  of  front- 
order  are : — 

1868.  Front  predicative  adjectives:  thoughtless  he  may  be, 
but  not  vicious  \  victorious  indeed  they  were,  but  at  what  a  cost ! 
These  are  purely  literary  examples.  But  this  order  occurs 
also  as  a  vulgarism  in  such  phrases  as  right  you  are  1 

1869.  Front  object-word  :  this  he  owed  partly  to  his  father. 

1870.  Front  object-complement :  enclosed  you  will  find 
a  letter.  Compare  enclosed  is  a  letter  and  the  other  examples 
in  which  front-order  is  accompanied  by  verb-inversion  (1814). 

The  front  adjective  in  such  sentences  as  big  as  he  is^  I  know 
a  still  bigger  man  \  black  as  he  hcts  been  painted^  he  is  far  worse 
in  reality  is  the  necessary  result  of  their  grammatical  structure. 

For  the  front-order  in  of  fuel  they  had  plenty^  see  §§1868, 

1871. 

Group-order. 

1871.  Preposition-groups  normally  follow  their  head- 
words. Such  inversions  as  ^of  Corinth  king  on  the 
analogy  of  genitive  +  noun  are  rare  even  in  poetry.  But 
preposition-groups    often    take    emphatic  front-position   in 


§i87S.]  WORD-ORDER:   SENTENCES.  27 

prose  as  well  as  poetry :  of  fuel  they  had  plenty  \  of  cowardice 
he  has  never  been  accused;  and  with  verb-inversion:  |  of 
a  noble  race  was  he  \  to  such  straits  was  I  reduced.  Such 
constructions  as  three  sons,  of  whom  all  died  young  are  blend- 
ings  of . .  all  of  whom  died  young  and  .  .  who  all  died  young. 

Verbal-groups. 

1872.  The  position  of  verbal-groups  in  the  sentence  is 
quite  free :  hearing  you  were  in  want  of  a  secretary^  I  have 
come  to  tell  you  of  one  \  welU  this  being  now  settled^  let  us  go  on 
to  something  else  \  they  would  not  let  him  go  home^  it  being 
a  stormy  night. 

Sentences. 

1873.  In  groups  of  sentences  we  can  observe  the  same 
distinction  between  post-adjunct  and  pre-adjunct  order  as  in 
groups  of  words  (1871). 

1874.  Independent  sentences  follow  post-adjunct  order. 
Indeed,  no  other  order  would  be  possible  with  most  of  them, 
such  as  copulative  and  adversative  sentences. 

1875.  Dependent  sentences,  on  the  other  hand,  oflen 
follow  pre-adjunct  order,  especially  temporal,  hypothetical, 
and  causal  sentences  (466):  when  he  came,  I  was  not  at 
home  I  if  I  can ^  I  will  do  it  \  as  I  saw  it  was  no  use  arguing^ 
I  said  no  more.  The  reverse  order  is  nearly  always  allow- 
able :  /  was  at  home  when  he  came  \  I  will  do  it  if  I  can. 
The  general  principle  is,  of  course,  to  put  in  front  the 
sentence  which  is  most  emphatic  or  most  closely  connected 
with  what  precedes.  But  in  some  cases  the  order  is  fixed, 
especially  when  there  is  a  difference  of  meaning.  Thus 
causal  clauses  introduced  by  as  always  precede,  for,  if  they 
followed  the  head- sentence,  they  would  be  understood  as 
clauses  of  comparison  i^do  as  you  please  /).  This  seems  to 
show  that  with  dependent  sentences  the  pre-adjunct  order  is 
the  normal  one. 


28  SYNTAX,  [§1876. 

1876.  Front-position  of  conjunctive  and  relative  clauses  is 
sometimes  regular,  as  in  what  you  say  is  true,  sometimes 
exceptional  and  rhetorical,  as  in  what  he  wants  1  do  not 
know. 

Elliptical  Order. 

1877.  In  the  elliptical  language  used  in  titles  of  books, 
headings  of  chapters,  indexes,  etc.  there  are  many  deviations 
from  the  order  of  the  ordinary  language.  Thus  in  an  index 
to  a  book  of  history  v^re  should  find  the  French  Revolution 
given  as  Revolution^  The  French  in  the  strictly  logical  order, 
while  the  order  in  William  the  Conqueror,  being  already 
logical,  is  retained.  So  also  with  proper  names  the  more 
important  surname  would  come  first :  Mill,  John  Stuart, 

1878.  This  elliptical  style  also  has  an  emphatic  order 
different  from  that  of  the  ordinary  language,  as  in  Waterloo, 
Battle  of. 

1879.  In  some  cases  this  elliptical  order  has  passed  into 
common  speech,  as  when  we  say  nine  thirty  instead  of 
half-past  nine, 

1880.  Another  kmd  of  elliptical  order  is  preserved  in 
such  phrases  as  /*/  costs  five  shillings  a  pound  \  I  paid  twopence 
each  for  them  \  do  you  mean  last  Monday ^  or  Monday  week  ?  \ 
He  lives  at  six^  Queens  Road, 


SENTENCE-STRESS. 

1881.  In  addition  to  the  three  degrees  of  stress  already 
distinguished  (659),  we  now  require  a  fourth — extra  stress, 
marked  (;). 

1882.  The  general  principle  of  sentence-stress  is  to  put 
strong  stress  on  those  words  which  are  prominent  in  any 
way,  and  to  give  weak  stress  to  those  which  are  subordinate 
to  them  (736,  880). 

1883.  Hence  the  general  tendency  is  to  give  strong  stress 


§i888.J         .  SENTENCE-STRESS.  29 

to  full  words,  weak  stress  to  form-words.  But  if  a  full  word 
becomes  subordinate  m  meaning,  it  can  take  weaker  stress 
(a  :piece  0/ bread).  Conversely,  if  a  word  which  is  usually 
subordinate  is  made  emphatic  or  becomes  logically  promi- 
nent, it  can  receive  strong  stress. 

1884.  In  connected  speech  all  words  that  express  new 
ideas  are  more  or  less  emphatic,  and  therefore  take  strong 
stress;  while  words  that  express  ideas  that  are  already 
familiar  or  can  be  taken  for  granted,  are  unemphatic  and 
have  a  weaker  stress :  a  German  :came  to  London  .  .  the 
.'German  left : London,  and  .-went  to  Liverpool. 

1885.  In  such  a  sentence  as  -I  :got  wet  the  first  word  is 
understood  from  the  context,  and  the  second  is  a  mere 
connecting  word,  so  that  the  stress  necessarily  falls  on  wet  by 
what  may  be  called  'negative  emphasis.'  But  in  look  how 
;wet  I  am!  there  is  increased  stress  on  wet,  which  gives  it 
the  meaning  *  very  wet ' ;  this  is  positive  emphasis  or 
emphatic  stress.  If  the  word  very  is  put  in,  there  is  no 
necessity  for  emphatic  stress :  you  are  'very  'wet. 

1886.  The  example  just  given  is  one  of  what  may  be 
called  intensive  stress.  Another  example  is  you  will  catch 
your  jdeath  of  cold.  Intensive  stress  is  often  emotional,  ex- 
pressing excitement:  ;what,  do  not  you  know?  \  what  on 
;earth  is  the  matter  ?  \  ;good  jheavens,  gentlemen  ! 

1887.  A  less  emotional  form  of  intensive  stress  is  that 
which  expresses  the  idea  *  even ' :  enough  to  make  a  ;saint 
swear !  [no  extra  stress  in  enough  to  make  even  a  saint  swear^  | 
/  would  not  have  it  at  a  ;gift  \  I  did  not  do  it:  L  never  should 
have  /thought  0/  such  a  thing, 

1888.  Another  form  is  that  which  expresses  antithesis : 
he  did  not  remember  your  name,  how  could  he  ;help  remem- 
bering it,  when  he  hears  it  twenty  times  a  day  ?  \  we  shall  be 
too  late,  after  all.  I  ;told  you  so  \  you  have  made  a  great 
mistake.  I  jknow  I  have.  In  the  first  example  the  anti- 
thesis is  between  not  remembering  and  the  impossibility  of 


30  SYNTAX  [§  1889. 

not  remembering ;  the  other  two  imply  the  antithesis '  you  tell 
me  this  as  something  new,  but  I  told  you — 1  knew  about  it — 
before/  In  all  these  examples  the  extra  stress  might  be 
accompanied  by  the  compound-rise  tone  (1951),  which  would 
suggest  the  emotional  element  of  peevishness  or  impatience. 
The  second  might  be  accompanied  by  the  compound  fall 
(1952),  with  a  different  shade  of  meaning.  In  such  an 
example  as  the  following,  the  extra  stress  seems  to  be  neces- 
sarily accompanied  by  the  compound  rise:  can  he  do  it?  hi 
;says  he  can, 

1889.  In  the  above  examples  the  extra  stress  adds  some- 
thing to  the  meaning,  but  in  some  cases  the  extra  stress  falls 
on  words  which  are  already  intensive,  without  modifying  their 
meaning,  as  in  I ; quite  agree  withyou^  where  the  substitution 
of  ordinary  strong  stress  would  not  alter  the  meaning.  In 
fact,  It  is  logically  impossible  to  add  anything  to  the  force  of 
such  words  as  quite,  all,  always^  never.  But  this  kind  of  stress 
may  suggest  something  emotional,  as  in  I  will  ;very  soon 
show  you  what  I  mean,  where  it  may  imply  threat.  The 
practice  of  giving  extra  stress  indiscriminately  to  all  intensive 
words  is  a  common  fault,  especially  among  women. 

1890.  When  two  or  more  words  are  contrasted,  either 
they  receive  extra  stress  or  the  stress  of  the  repeated  word  is 
diminished :  some  English  people  have  ;light  :hairy  some  have 
;dark  :hair  \  the  town  imouse  and  the  country  :mouse.  So  also 
in  counting,  such  numerals  as  'thirteen,  'fourteen,  'fifteen  have 
the  stress  on  the  first  syllable,  while  when  isolated  they  have 
even  stress  'thirteen^  etc.  (922).  We  may  call  this  'con- 
trasting stress.' 

1891.  Modifying  stress  is  similar :  the  earth  is  round,  it 
is  not  ; quite  round,  but  a  little  flattened. 

1892.  The  completion  of  a  series  is  marked  by  what  may 
be  called  climax-stress :  one,  two^  three,  and  a;way  I  \  here 
and  there  and  ; everywhere  \  the  days  of  the  week  are  Sunday, 
Monday  .  .  ;  Saturday. 


§  1896.]  SENTENCE-STRESS.  31 

1893.  In  such  a  sentence  as  shall  we  smoke  a  ;pipe  to- 
igether  ?  compared  with  shall  we  smoke  a  pipe?  the  extra  stress 
is  not  the  result  of  emphasis,  but  of  the  following  weak- 
stressed  word,  the  effect  of  the  increased  stress  being  to  bind 
the  two  words  together  more  closely,  as  in  goodmatured  man 
compared  with  -good-natured  (929).  We  can  call  this  group- 
ing stress.  Other  examples  are  :  /  am  going  to  ;call  on  him 
\I  am  going  to  call  on  some  -friends']  \  one  gets  ;used  to 
things  I  a  room  with  the  ^-windows  shut  \  I  forgot  to  wind  my 
;watch  up  [.  .  wind  up  my  watch]  \  I  did  nothing  ;wrong^ 
'did  I? 

1894.  So  also  formulae  and  traditional  phrases  are  bound 
together  by  one  word  in  them  having  a  predominant  stress : 
the  house  that  ;fack  built  \  all  is  well  that  ;ends  well  \  this  day 
;week  \  cut  and  come  a;gain.  The  general  tendency  in  such 
combinations  is  to  stress  the  modifying  word. 

1895.  If  a  naturally  weak-stressed  connective  word  is 
separated  from  the  words  which  would  otherwise  follow  it  by 
an  inserted  group  or  clause,  it  receives  strong  break-stress : 
he  'is,  physically  speaking,  a  failure  \  a  man  -who,  if  he  had 
the  chance,  would  do  great  things  \  'if,  as  is  most  probable, .  .  | 
-but,  said  he,  .  . 

1896.  There  are  some  formal  connecting  words,  such  as 
be^  which  have  little  or  no  meaning  in  themselves,  and  are 
therefore  incapable  of  independent  emphasis.  .  Hence  a 
strong — that  is,  in  this  case,  an  extra  strong — stress  on  such 
words  is  felt  to  be  equivalent  to  emphasizing  the  whole 
sentence:  what ;  are  you  doing?  \  what  ;  does  he  know  about 
it?  \you  are  late.  I  ;am  rather  late  \  he  will  be  angry.  ;let 
him  be  angry  !  We  may  call  this  distributed  stress.  The 
positive  emphatic  non-interrogative  forms  of  the  verb  (2169) 
always  have  distributed  stress :  I  ;did  say  so. 

The  contrasting  stress  in  man  never /is,  but  always  to  jbe  blest 
applies  logically  not  to  the  verb  itself  but  to  its  distinctions  of 
tense :  as  such  verbs  as  is  have  a  meaning  of  their  own  from 


32  SYNTAX,  [§  1897. 

this  point  of  view,  strong  stress  on  them  is  not  necessarily 
distributed. 

The  strong— not  extra  strong— stress  in  such  sentences  as 
what  is  itt  is  only  negative,  being  the  result  of  the  subordination 
of  «//^^/ (1915). 

1897.  As  even  stress  tends  to  balance  words  against  one 
another  (898),  it  is  the  rule  in  combinations  of  adjectives 
(both  assumptive  and  predicative)  with  nouns,  and  of  adverbs 
of  marked  meaning  with  other  words :  'three  'big  'dogs  \  I  am 
'quite  'ready  \  it  rains  hard.  This  is  especially  the  case  with 
negative  words :  I  think  not  [I  think  -so]  \  I  cannot  go  ('kaant 
•gou)  'now  compared  with  /  -can  go. 

1898.  But  negative  words  sometimes  have  weak  stress,  as 
in  have  you  heard  whether  the  house  is  insured  or  -not?^  where 
the  not  is  not  stressed  because  it  is  logically  superfluous  [but : 
you  will  have  to  do  it  whether  you  like  it  or  'not\  and  in  some 
cases  where  it  forms  a  sort  of  compound  with  an  intensive 
word :  the  voyage  is  certainly  -not  a  long  one.  So  also  in 
/  would  rather  -not  go.  But  when  not  precedes  such  words 
it  takes  the  stress ;  not  -very  well  \  not  :quite  ready  \  it  is  not 
-yet  time. 

So  also  such  contractions  as  (kaant,  wount)  presuppose 
can-notf  will-not. 

1899.  When  sentence-words  and  sentence-groups  stand 
in  the  unemphatic  end-position,  they  undergo  enclitic 
stress- weakening :  are  you  going  jhome,  :John  ?  ['John^  are 
you  going  'home .'']  yeSy-sir  \  sohie  breads  -please  I  \  it  is  late, 

'isn't  -it?  I'zsn't  it  'late  ?\ 

1900.  If  three  strong-stressed  words  come  together — 
especially  in  immediate  succession,  but  also  with  intervening 
weak-stressed  words — the  stress  of  the  middle  word  is  often 
reduced,  especially  if  it  is  a  monosyllable,  as  in  English  .-plum- 
'pudding  compared  with  'plum'pudding  \  five  .'minutes  to  nine 
[^five  -minutes]  \  a  great  :big  man  \  a  heavy  .'round  stone  \  a 
little  :more  room  \  all  :day  long  \  two:poundten  \  a  hard. 'day's 


§  1905.]  SENTENCE-STRESS,  33 

work.  But  this  happens  only  when  the  middle  word  can  be 
regarded  as  subordinate  to  the  preceding  word  or  as  being 
specially  connected  with  it,  not  when  they  are  all  of  equal 
weight  and  independence,  as  in  a  'thick  -gold  'chain  \  it  is 
very  hot  in  here  with  'that  'big  'fire  \  'ten  'years  a'go. 

Hence  also  the  distinction  that  might  be  made  between  he 
'failed  com'pletely  to  ex' plain  his  meaning  and  he  'failed 
com.'pletely  to  ex'plain  his  meaning.  In  the  former  the  adverb 
modifies /<a!27<?^;  in  the  latter  it  modifies  explain^  with  which  it 
is  felt  to  form  one  stress-group. 

1901.  Rapid  speech  is  unfavourable  to  even  stress.  If 
two  even-stressed  syllables  come  together  at  the  end  of 
a  sentence,  there  is  a  tendency  in  rapid  speech  to  throw  the 
stress  forward,  so  that  such  a  word  as  *Chi'nese  becomes 
:Chi'nesey  unless  there  is  some  special  reason  for  throwing 
the  stress  on  to  the  first  syllable. 

1902.  In  the  colloquial  combination  nice  and-\-  adjective — 
where  the  nice  is  practically  a  vague  'very' — the  second 
adjective  takes  the  principal  stress :  the  roads  are  mice  and 
*dry.     Compare  :cup  and  'saucer  (928). 

1903.  Combinations  of  verbs  of  full  meaning  with  other 
words  may  have  even  stress :  to  'change  ones  'mind  \  it  rains 
hard  \  he  came  running, 

1904.  But  when  a  verb  is  intimately  connected  with  its 
object- word  or  object-complement  etc.,  so  as  to  form  a  kind 
of  compound  with  it,  the  stress  of  the  verb  is  often  subor- 
dinated to  that  of  its  modifier :  to  dight  a  'fire  \  open  the  door  I  \ 
to  run  a  race  \  to  feel  too  full. 

But  shall  we  have  thejfire  .'lighted  t  by  grouping-stress. 

1905.  So  also  when  a  verb  is  followed  by  a  preposition- 
group  with  which  it  is  intimately  connected  :  to:gofor  a  'walk  \ 
to  fly  into  a  passion  \  to  cut  it  in  two.  Similarly  in  such  com- 
binations as  :go  -out  'hunting.  But  the  verb  may  also  take 
the  stress :  he  stood  behind  the  door. 

VOL.  II.  D 


34  SYNTAX.  [§1906 

^1006.  When  a  verb  is  intimately  connected  with  another 
verb  or  verbal,  it  tends  to  subordinate  its  stress,  especially  in 
the  combination  verb  +  and  •\-  verb:  shall  I  :go  and  look  for 
him  ?  I  coine  and  try !  \  I  heard  him  'go  \  did  you  see  him 
'Start  ?  I  we  have  come  to  'stay. 

1907.  But  in  the  combination  verb  +  adverb  there  is  often 
even  stress,  even  when  the  two  are  intimately  connected :  to 
'lie  'down  on  the  'sofa  \  dressed  up  like  a  Turk  \  put  it  down  I  \ 
my  watch  has  not  been  wound  up  [wind  -up  a  watch,  §  1900]. 
Note  the  distinction  between  to  carry  about  and  to  cry  -about, 

1908.  In  some  cases,  however,  the  adverb  has  the  stress : 
to  see  him  'off  [but  to  'go  -off'^  \  to  run  a'way.  Such  sentences 
as  'come  'in  /  may  also  be  pronounced  :come  in  /  to  express 
impatience. 

When  the  adverb  is  followed  by  a  preposition-group,  the 
adverb  necessarily  takes  grouping- stress :  to  kick  joui  at 
him  I  when  do  you  get  jup  in  the  morning  f 

1909.  Prepositions  of  definite  and  marked  meaning  may 
have  full  stress,  as  in  be'hind  the  'door  \  since  then  \  he  is  a'bout 
'my  'height  \  without  light  we  cannot  distinguish  colours^  while 
those  of  indefinite  and  abstract  meaning,  such  as  at,  of  on, 
are  generally  subordinated  to  other  words,  as  in  -at  the  door  \ 
in  life  compared  with  'through  'life  \  -from,  'under  the  'table. 
Hence  a  preposition  may  have  different  stress  according  to 
its  meaning,  as  in  -under  an  obligation  compared  with  'under 
•age. 

1910.  But  in  combination  with  pronouns  all  prepositions 
may  take  the  chief  stress,  as  in  -will you  :go  with  -him  ?  com- 
pared with  -will  you  go  -with  that  man  ?  \  :run  'after  -him, 
with  grouping-stress.  Even  of  may  take  the  stress,  as  in 
niuhat  -of -it!,  where  it  is  preceded  by  a  word  of  subordinate 
stress. 

1911.  If,  however,  a  strongly  stressed  word  precedes,  the 
preposition  loses  its  stress  as  Well  as  the  pronoun  :  /  will 
think  -of  -it  I  do  not  talk  about  it! 


§  1915.]  SENTENCE-STRESS.  35 

1912.  In  some  cases  differences  of  stress — which  are 
often  further  accompanied  by  changes  of  sound — give  rise 
to  doublets  with  special  divergencies  of  meaning  and 
function.  The  rules  which  follow  are  of  course  liable  to  be 
crossed  by  the  general  principles  of  emphasis  already  laid 
down. 

1913.  this  and  that  generally  have  strong  stress  both  as 
nouns  and  as  adjectives :  '/hts  'shows  -that .  .\is  that  you  ?  \ 
these  young  men.  But  if  the  demonstrative  meaning  is  not 
strong,  they  may  have  medium  stress,  as  in  :th{s  hook  has  not 
had  its  leaves  cut  compared  with  'this  book  is  one  of  those 
1  want.  So  also  when  they  are  used  as  nouns  in  the  sense 
of  *  it  *  without  any  special  demonstrative  meaning :  /  saw 
:that  (or  -that)  quite  clearly. 

The  adverb  (^at)  has  of  course  only  weak  stress.  So  also  the 
relative  pronoun  (^3t). 

1914.  So  also  the  corresponding  adverbs  here  and  there 
generally  have  strong  stress :  here  is  your  money !  \  there  he 
goes  I  I  come  here!  But  in  the  case  of  these  words  also, 
weakened  demonstrative  meaning  is  accompanied  by 
weakening  of  stress,  as  in  did  you  read  as  far  as  page  ten  ?  we 
left  off  'there  compared  with  we  left  off  'there,  which  would 
imply  pointing  to  the  place.  After  verbs  their  stress  is 
often  weakened  :  /  saw  him  -there  yesterday  \  the  sooner  we 
get  -there  the  better! 

In  all  the  above  cases  there  keeps  the  sound  (^ea) :  the  weak 
(^ar)  has  of  course  only  weak  stress. 

1915.  The  interrogative  what  and  which  have  weak  or 
medium  stress  when  used  as  nouns,  strong  stress  when  used 
as  adjectives,  as  in  -which  'boy  did  it P  \  at  what  time?  com- 
pared with  -which  'is  it?  \  -what  is  the  time?  The  interroga- 
tive who  is  used  only  as  a  noun,  and  has  weak  stress :  -who 

is  -it?  what  and  which  when  used  as  adjectives  have  strong 

D  2 


36  SYNTAX.  [§1916. 

Stress  in  all  their  other  functions  :  submit  with  what  grace  he 
can  I  which  philosopher  (relative). 

The  exclamation  what/  has  strong  stress,  as  might  be 
expected. 

1916.  Interrogative  adverbs  have  weak  or  medium 
stress :  where  does  he  live  ?  \  when  did  he  come  ?  \  why  did  he 
do  it? 

1917.  But  in  repeated  questions  all  these  interrogative 
words  take  extra  stress  :  jwhat  did  you  say  his  name  was?\ 
;where  does  he  live  ? 

1918.  Relative  noun-pronouns  and  adverbs  have  weak 
stress  :  a  man  -who  could  do  great  things  \  the  place  where  he 
lives.  When  used  as  conjunctives  these  words  also  have 
weak  stress :  /  know  -who  he  is  \  doesiit  he  know  -where  to  look 
for  it?  (note  that  this  sentence  is  negative  in  form  but  not  in 
meaning)  |  /  see  how  it  is  done.  But  if  the  preceding  clause 
has  a  negative  meaning,  they  have  extra  strong  stress :  /  do 
not  know  ;who  he  is  \  I  have  not  the  slightest  idea  what  he 
means  \  he  will  not  know  where  to  look  for  it  |  /  cannot  think 
how  it  is  done. 

1919.  enough  has  strong  stress  except  when  it  follows  the 
word  it  modifies :  enough  breads  enough  of  this  but  bread 
-enough^  good  -enough. 

1920.  some  with  strong  stress  is  a  quantitative  word :  with 
'some  'difficulty  \  some  .'people  think  so.  In  the  partitive 
meaning  *  a  little '  it  is  weakened  into  (sam)  with  weak  stress : 
-some  water  \  -some  more  bread. 

1921.  The  weak  forms  of  the  auxiliaries  occur  only 
before  the  nucleus  (120)  and — in  the  case  of  be — before  the 
predicate :  compare  /  shall  ( Jl)  go  with  /  think  I  shall  (-Jael)  | 
he  is  (hijz)  a  good  fellow  with  what  a  good  fellow  he  is  (-iz) ! 
In  other  constructions  they  often  have  strong  stress,  especially 
be :  and  'who  'is  -he  ?  \  I  wonder  -where  -he  'is  \  -is  -he  ready  ? 
I  expect  he  'is. 


§1926.]  INTONATION.  37 

1922.  -havers' must/  -have  (haev,  3ev)=' cause,  have/  the 
weak  (h9v,  av)  being  used  only  as  an  auxiliary,  and  occasion- 
ally in  the  sense  of  '  possess ' :  you  will  'have  to  -have  (hsev) 
your  hair  cut  \  to  -have  a  party  \  he  -has  a  cold. 

1923.  must  has  strong  stress,  except  in  such  phrases  as 
you  -must  (mas)  know  that .  . ,  where  it  is  almost  unmeaning. 

Note  that  compulsion  is  expressed  by  strong  stress — /  -must 
'say  I  agree  with  him  in  that  opinion — logical  necessity  by 
extra  stress  :  you  ;must  :know  what  I  mean  / 

1924.  The  weak-stressed  auxiliaries  are  all  capable  of 
receiving  emphatic  stress:  they  said  nothing,  why  jshould 
they  have  said  anything  ?  \  I ; should  like  you  to  see  it  I  \  why 
iwtll  you  persist  in  denying  it?  \  we  ;can  but  try. 

Intonation. 

1925.  The  tones  have  both  an  emotional  and  a  logical 
significance. 

The  level  tone  is  plaintive — especially  the  high  level  tone 
— ^and  suggests  the  idea 'of  suspensiveness.  The  level  tone 
is  not  much  used  in  English,  where  it  has  much  the  same 
function  as  the  rising  tone. 

The  rising  tone  is  associated  with  cheerfulness,  animation, 
surprise,  expectation,  hesitation,  and  suggests  suspensiveness, 
incompletion,  and  question. 

The  falling  tone  is  the  natural  expression  of  dogmatism, 
resolution,  command,  and  suggests  the  ideas  of  completion, 
finality,  certainty,  and  of  answer  as  opposed  to  question. 

For  the  compound  tones  see  §  1950  foil. 

1926.  Hence  declarative  sentences  normally  end  with  a 
falling  tone,  the  preceding  portions  of  the  sentence  being 
uttered  with  rising  or  level  tones  to  show  that  the  meaning  is 
not  yet  complete.  l^hMsyou  are  quite'  ox  you  are  quite  makes 
us  expect  some  word  or  words  ending  in  a  falling  tone  to 
complete  the  meaning :  you  are  quite  right^.  If,  on  the  other 
hand,  the  predicate  comes  first,  it  is  uttered  with  a  rising  tone 


38  SYNTAX.  [§  1937. 

to  show  that  the  subject  is  being  waited  for  to  complete  the 
sentence :  greai^  is  Diana  of  the  Ephesians^, 

1927.  Hence  also  general  interrogative  sentences  have  a 
rising,  special  interrogative  sentences  a  falling  tone  (503,  4) : 
is  he  here'  ?  \  where  is  he'^?  But  special  interrogative  sen- 
tences have  a  rising  tone — together  with  extra  stress  on  the 
interrogative  word  (1017) — when  the  question  is  a  repeated 
one  :  ;mhat  is  his  name — what  did  you  say  his  name  was'? 

For  the  intonation  of  alternative  questions — as  in  is  he  an 
Oxford  or  a  Cambridge  man  ? — see  §  505. 

1928.  When  the  hearer  of  a  statement  repeats  the  whole 
or  part  of  it,  he  utters  it  with  a  rising  tone,  to  show  that  he 
is  expecting  confirmation  :  my  name  is  Smith"".  Smith':  then 
you  are  the  man  I  am  looking  for^. 

1929.  Surprise  or  indignation  is  expressed  in  a  single 
word  by  a  long  rise,  as  in  whatf  /,  in  groups  and  sentences  by 
a  fall,  exclamative  sentences  (502)  being  regarded  as  em- 
phatic affirmative  ones  :  good  heavens^  !  \  how  well  he  looks'^  / 

1930.  Command  is,  of  course,  expressed  by  a  fall. 

1931.  But  statements  and  commands  are  often  uttered 
with  a  rising  instead  of  a  falling  tone  to  mark  them  as 
questionable  or  hesitating  :  is  it  fine'?  yes',  it  is  pretty  finef 
[compare ^^j^,  //  looks  quite  set/led^']. 

1932.  The  idea  of  question  thus  implied  is  often  used  to 
suggest  that  of  appeal  or  remonstrance :  /  have  done  all 
X  can'  =  *  I  have  done  all  I  can,  haven't  I  ? '  |  /  wish  you 
would  let  me  alon/.  So  also  all  rights  may  imply  *  why  don't 
you  start  ? '  or  '  we  are  waiting  for  you  to  start.' 

1933.  The  rising  tone  also  serves  to  soften  a  contradiction, 
as  m  your  friend  is  late,  it  is  not  late':  it  is  only  three  0^ clock! ^ 
a  command,  whether  direct,  as  in  don't  forget  to  post  that 
letter'^  or  implied,  as  in  now  you'll  remember  what  I  have  said'y 
or  a  refusal,  as  in  will  you  have  another  cup  of  tea  ?  no' y  thank 
you'. 

1934.  Lastly,  the  rising  tone  often  serves  merely  to  give 


§i94i]  INTONATION.  39 

a  general  character  of  cheerfulness  or  geniality  to  what  is 
said :  well',  good  by/ ;  hope  to  see  you  again  soon\ 

1936.  But  the  falling  tone  can  be  used  in  all  the 
examples  given  in  the  last  three  paragraphs,  and  would, 
indeed,  be  preferred  by  many  speakers,  especially  those  who 
wish  to  show  a  firm  and  decided  character. 

1936.  The  brevity  and  imperativeness  of  special  interroga- 
tive sentences  such  as  what  is  his  name''  ?  is  often  avoided  by 
substituting  a  longer  general  interrogative  form  :  can  you  tell 
me  what  his  name  is'  ? 

1937.  If  a  general  interrogative  sentence  «is  uttered  with 
a  falling  instead  of  a  rising  tone,  it  expresses  command  or 
impatience  ;  will  you  do  as  you  are  told>  I  \  ;are  you  ready""  ? 
In  such  cases  the  auxiliary  often  takes  emphatic  stress  (1896). 

1938.  When  a  negative  interrogative  sentence  is  used 
rhetorically  to  express  affirmation,  it  necessarily  takes  the 
falling  tone :  isn't  it  wonderful^  1  \  he  is  very  egotistical.  yeSy 
isn't  he""  1 

1939.  Sentence  -  intonation  is  generally  continuous, 
abrupt  transitions  from  rising  to  falling  tone  and  vice-versa 
being  avoided  as  much  as  possible. 

1940.  In  such  a  sentence  as  it  is  fine,  frosty  weathef^  the 
falling  tone  begins,  not  on  the  last  syllable,  but  on  the 
preceding  stressed  one,  the  fall  being  continued  downward 
through  the  last  syllable.  If  an  enclitic  word  such  as  sir 
were  added,  the  fall  would  still  begin  on  the  first  syllable  of 
weather,  and  would  be  continued  through  the  enclitic.  So 
also  in  it  ivill  be  fine'^  to-morrow,  I  hope.  In  the  same  way  all 
other  modifiers  of  the  predicate  are  subordinated  to  it  in 
tone,  even  if  they  have  full  stress:  he  is  the  most  obstinate 
child>  I  have  ever  had  to  deal  with. 

1941.  If  a  complete  sentence  has  a  full-stressed  tag  added, 
the  tag  is  uttered  with  a  separate  fall  of  its  own,  instead  of 
merely  continuing  the  preceding  one:  he  is  stupid",  very^ 
stupid.     Here  the  voice,  after  reaching  a  low  pitch  at  the  end 


40  SYNTAX.  [§  194a. 

of  the  first  fall,  leaps  up  and  begins  a  fresh  fall.  Even  if  the 
original  sentence  is  not  quite  finished,  it  may  have  separate 
falling  stress  in  such  examples  as  he  is  a  iall>,  a  very  tal1> 
gentleman. 

1942.  Enclitic  additions  to  a  complete  rising-tone  sentence 
simply  continue  the  rise:   are  you  read/y  gentlemen?  \  will 

you  make  a  little  room\  please  sir  ? 

1943.  The  following  are  examples  of  independent  rises : 
gentlemen^  are  you  ready'  ?  |  are  you  ready' — all'  of  you  ? 

1944.  When  two  or  more  clauses  are  intimately  connected, 
there  is  no  tone-break  till  the  end  of  the  whole  group  :  tell  us 
who  your  new  friend""  is  I  \  it  would  be  better  if  you  were  to  do^ 
it  yourself  So  also  in  such  combinations  as  more  haste' ^ 
worse  speed>.  This  is  of  course  still  more  necessary  when 
there  is  contraction,  or  in  extended  sentences  (486,  8).  In 
sequences  (482) — where  there  is  no  formal  connexion — each 
sentence  keeps  its  own  independent  tone — whether  rising  or 
falling — unless  a  rising  tone  is  required  to  show  the  con- 
nexion more  clearly,  as  in  /  am  sorry  I  could  not  come 
before^  ;  I  had  to  finish  writing  a  letter^. 

1945.  When  the  first  clause  introduces  a  statement  etc., 
it  takes  rising  tone  if  it  is  grammatically  unfinished  :  he  said' 
he  did  not  care^  \  the  difficulty  'is',  how  are  we  to  get  back^  ? 
Otherwise  it  takes  the  falling  tone :  what  he  said  was  this""  .  . 
I  he  speaks  somewhat  in  this  way^  .  . 

1946.  Inserted  or  parenthetic  groups  or  clauses  (467) 
naturally  have  rising  tones  :  he  is  a  man  who',  if  he  chose' ^ 
might  do  great  things^. 

1947.  But,  on  the  principle  of  the  continuity  of  stress,  if 
the  whole  group  shows  a  marked  falling  tendency,  the 
inserted  words  follow  it. 

1948.  If  the  appended  or  inserted  words  have  a  marked 
meaning  of  their  own  dependent  on  their  intonation,  that 
intonation  is  kept,  which  often  results  in  broken  intonation  : 
which  will  you  have^^  tea'  or  coffee^  ?     When  a  tag  keeps  its 


§1952.]  INTONATION.  41 

independent  intonation  (together  with  its  full  stress),  it  is 
either  emphatic,  or  else  is  felt  as  detached — as  if  it  were 
added  with  hesitation :  which  will  you  have''  ?  tea>y  please 
[iea^y  -please']  \  there  is  the  bell  again> :  it  is  Frederick^,  of 
course y  isn'f  it?  I  will  call  to-morrow^  ^  if  I  can  [. .  to-morrow^  ^ 
if  I  -can\, 

1949.  Broken  intonation  is,  of  course,  less  frequent  in  the 
case  of  insertion,  as  insertions  are  generally  not  emphatic: 
t  but  thou\  if  thou  shouldest  never  see  my  face  again^^  pray  for 
my  soul>  ! 

1960.  In  the  compound  tones  the  second  element  deter- 
mines the  general  meaning  of  the  whole  tone,  and  the  first 
element  only  modifies  this  general  meaning.  These  tones 
are  always  accompanied  by  extra  stress,  because  of  their 
emphatic  meaning. 

1951.  The  compound  rise  expresses  doubt  of  some 
implied  statement,  so  that  it  expresses  distrust,  caution, 
warning:  "^  I  will  not  try  it;  "^you  may  \  take  ^  caret  if  you 
"^do  ity  it  will  be  at  your  own  "^  risk.  Hence  it  is  used  in 
cautious  contradiction:  but  for  all  ^  that ^  he  is  an  exceptior^. 
Also  in  contradiction  or  modification  of  the  speaker's  own 
statements :  /  am  sure  he  will  come  again"" :  at  least  I  ^  think 
he  will\  In  its  more  logical  uses  it  expresses  contrast  or 
exception :  /  am  what  the  world  calls  a  woman-hater^ ;  what 
'^ I  call  a  philosopher'^  \  the  dinner  was  very  good>^  wasiif^  it? 
the  ^  wine  was  bad^.  It  sometimes  has  an  intensive  meaning. 
It  sometimes  contradicts  the  meaning  of  the  word  it  falls  on: 
was  it  raining  when  you  came  in'  ?  '^  rather  I  [rather'  would 
imply  '  only  a  little ']. 

1952.  In  the  compound  fall  the  relations  between  the 
two  elements  are  reversed.  This  tone  hints  at  a  doubt,  and 
disposes  of  it  by  a  dogmatic  assertion.  Hence  it  expresses 
contempt  or  sarcasm:  ^/  can  do  if.  you!  It  also  ex- 
presses remonstrance,  contradiction,  contrast,  not  cautiously, 


42  SYNTAX.  [§1953- 

as  the  compound  rise  does,  but  confidently  and  dogmatically  : 
what\  are  you  going  already  ?  you  have  only  just  ^  come  / 
I  Sunday  isn't  the  da/;  it  is  ^  Monday  I  \  you  say  you  are 
sure  of  finishing  it';  hut  ^  when  will  you  finish  if"  / — that  is 
the  question"".  Sometimes  the  dogmatic  element  disappearsj 
and  the  intonation  has  simply  an  emphatic  effect,  with 
perhaps  a  trace  of  impatience  or  contempt :  you  ought  to  have 
done  something  to  prevent  it,  what  could  I  ^do?  |  shall  we 
have  time'?  '^oh^yes. 


NOUNa 

Gender. 

106S.  In  Modem  English  the  only  gender-concord  of 
nouns  is  with  some  of  the  personal  pronouns ;  and  accord- 
ingly, the  only  general  test  of  noun-gender  is  its  association 
with  he^  she,  it, 

1964.  Modern  English  has  lost  all  traces  of  the  gram- 
matical genders  of  Old-English.  Nevertheless,  the  genders 
are  not  entirely  natural. 

1956.  Words  denoting  the  young  of  men  and  animals 
without  implying  any  special  sex  are  often  neuter — less 
frequently  however  in  the  case  of  human  beings:  a  simple 
child ,  ,  what  should  it  know  of  death  ?  \  the  other  twin  fell 
with  its  face  in  a  furze-bush. 

1956.  it  is  sometimes  applied  to  human  beings  to  express 
contempt :  what  a  silly  fellow  it  is/ 

1967.  Names  of  animals  when  used  without  any  personal 
feeling  towards  individual  animals  are  generally  neuter.  The 
lower  the  animal  in  the  scale,  the  more  exclusively  the  neuter 
is  used. 

1958.  But  in  the  spoken  language  there  is  a  tendency  to 
give  a  personal  gender  to  the  higher  animals  without  regard 
to  the  sex  of  the  individual  animal.     Thus  dog,  horse,  fish. 


§  1963.]  NOUNS :   GENDER.  43 

canary     are     generally   masculine,    cat^    hare,   parrot    are 
generally  feminine. 

1959.  Names  of  things  are  often  personified  in  colloquial 
speech.  Such  words  as  ship^  boat,  balloon,  steam-engine  and 
names  of  machines  are  made  feminine,  especially  by  those 
who  are  constantly  employed  with  such  things,  but  also — 
especially  in  the  case  of  words  for  ships  and  boats — by  the 
majority  of  speakers,  although  it  is  always  allowable  to  use 
the  neuter.  This  personification  seems  to  have  arisen  from 
a  fanciful  comparison  with  wife, 

1960.  The  names  of  smaller  objects  arc  made  masculine, 
such  as  watch,  pipe  (to  smoke  with).  Some  words,  such  as 
kite  (the  plaything),  may  be  either  masculine  or  feminine. 
But  this  kind  of  personification  is  less  general  than  the 
former,  and  is  left  more  to  the  caprice  of  the  speaker. 

1961.  It  is  to  be  observed  that  in  the  spoken  language  only 
artificial  objects  are  personified.  It  probably  began  with 
such  words  as  ship^  denoting  objects  capable  of  independent 
movement,  and  therefore  apparently  alive. 

1962.  In  the  literary  language  we  have  a  totally  different 
kind  of  personification.  That  this  literary  personification  is 
due  partly  to  Latin  influence  is  shown  by  the  fact  that  it 
makes  moon  feminine  and  sun  masculine  in  direct  opposition 
to  Old-English  usage.  But  the  usage  of  modern  poets,  though 
partly  founded  on  Latin  and  French  traditions,  is  mainly 
independent,  and  the  same  word  may  have  different  personal 
genders  assigned  to  it  by  different  writers,  while  another 
writer  may,  even  in  poetry,  keep  it  in  the  neuter  gender. 

1963.  The  general  principle  is  to  give  the  masculine 
gender  to  words  suggesting  such  ideas  as  strength,  fierceness, 
terror,  while  the  feminine  gender  is  associated  with  the  oppo- 
site ideas  of  gentleness,  delicacy,  beauty,  together  with  fertility. 
Thus  sun,  summer,  time,  winter,  death,  rage,  war  are  mascu- 
line, and  moon,  spring  (the  season),  dawn,  mercy,  peace,  earth 
are  feminine. 


44  SYNTAX.  [§1964. 

1964.  The  predominance  of  the  feminine  gender  in  Latin 
abstract  nouns  has  made  the  feminine  the  abstract  gender  in 
Modern  English  also,  even  where  there  are  otherwise  no 
specially  feminine  associations,  as  in  truth,  justice,  silence. 

1965.  In  Latin  most  names  of  countries  are  feminine. 
Hence  in  Modern  English  not  only  poets  but  also  newspaper- 
writers  make  such  words  as  Asia,  Britain,  France,  Germany 
feminine. 

Number. 

Singular  Individual  Noun  =  Collective  Noun. 

1966.  By  the  analogy  of  the  old  unchanged  plurals  such  as 
sheep,  a  large  number  of  names  of  animals  have  come  to  bfe 
used  in  a  collective  sense  without  any  plural  inflection,  as  in 
how  many  fish  have  you  caught?  two  salmon  and  three  trout. 
The  grammatical  difference  between  three  trout  and  three 
sheep  is  that  trout  is  formally  singular,  while  sheep  is,  or  may 
be,  formally  a  plural,  for  there  is  a  plural  trouts,  although  it 
is  not  much  used. 

1967.  This  usage  is  confined  to  the  names  of  wild  animals. 
Thusyi>Z£;/  if  used  collectively  must  be  put  in  the  plural,  as  in 
to  keep  fowls  =  to  keep  poultry,  where  the  individual  plural 

fowls  is  logically  equivalent  to  the  collective  singular  poultry ^ 
while  wildfowl  is  regularly  used  as  a  collective  without  any 
inflection :  to  shoot  wildfowl.  So  also  duck  in  to  shoot  duck 
would  imply  that  they  were  wild  ducks. 

The  occasional  use  of  the  collective  chicken  for  chickens  {to 
keep  chicken)  seems  to  be  the  result  of  the  ending  -en  having 
been  regarded  as  a  plural  inflection;  whence  also  the  new 
singular  chick. 

1968.  It  is  also  to  be  observed  that  these  collective 
singulars  are  used  only  when  the  animals  are  hunted  because 
of  their  usefulness  to  man,  or  are  taken  in  considerable 
numbers,  but  not  when  they  are  killed  only  in  self-defence  or 


§1971.]  NOUNS:   NUMBER.  45 

as  vermin.  Hence  the  strict  adherence  to  this  construction 
in  the  case  of  fish-names  [not,  however,  with  eel.  lobster  and 
some  others],  while  the  word/j^  itself,  being  more  vague,  is 
often  used  in  the  plural,  as  in  to  catch  three  fishes.  But  if 
fish  is  used  in  the  special  sense  of  salmon^  the  singular  form 
is  necessary :  he  killed  three  big  fish. 

1969.  Hence,  again,  while  this  usage  is  freely  extended 
to  unfamiliar  foreign  animals,  as  in  a  few  antelope[s\  herds  of 
buffalo{es)  and  giraffe{s),  to  hunt  pig  (implying  wild  boars),  it 
is  never  used  with  such  words  as  lion,  wolf  badger^  weasel) 
but  it  is  admissible  with  bear,  because  this  animal  is  hunted 
for  its  flesh. 

1970.  The  use  of  a  singular  individual  noun  in  a  collective 
sense  is  also  found  in  other  classes  of  words :  the  cannon(s) 
were  firing  shot  and  shell — rings  were  used  as  a  substitute  for 
coin(s)  I  written  in  blank  verse{s)  [but  to  write  Latin  verses\ 
In  the  last  two  examples  the  singular  seems  to  be  the  result 
of  the  analogy  of  the  collective  nouns  cash  (or  currency),  prose 
{prose  and  verse).  Other  examples  are  :  small  craft  =  *  small 
ships,'  horse  and  foot  =  *  cavalry  and  infantry,'  a  fleet  of  twenty 
sail,  where  sail  =  *  ships.'  These  differ  from  the  former  in 
using  the  noun  in  a  special  sense  as  well  as  collectively; 
hence  they  cannot  take  the  plural  inflection  without  returning 
to  their  original  meaning,  as  in  twenty  sails  compared  with 
twenty  sail. 

1971.  In  all  the  above  examples  the  noun  has  a  distinct 
individuality.  But  when  we  talk  of  the  hair  of  the  head,  we 
do  not  think  of  each  individual  hair,  but  rather  regard  hair  as 
a  material  noun,  like  iron,  so  that  we  really  have  two  distinct 
words,  ia)  the  material  noun  hair  with  no  plural  of  its  own 
{two  heads  of  hair),  and  {b)  the  individual  noun  hair '  filament 
of  hair '  with  plural  hairs :  she  has  more  hair  (collective)  than 
wit,  and  more  faults  than  hairs  (Shakespeare).  So  also  in  to 
plant  maple{s)  diXid  forests  of  pine  the  singular  seems  to  express 
the  idea  of  a  mass  of  trees.  We  have  the  same  fluctuation  in  to 


46  SYNTAX.  [§  197a. 

make  brick{s)  and  tiles  \  coals  are  (or  coal  t's)  cheaper  than 
wood.  So  also  va fruit  and  cakes,  the  ^\m2\  fruits  (fruits  of 
the  eartfi)  suggesting  the  idea  of  various  kinds  of  fruit  rather 
than  that  of  a  mass  or  plateful  of  fruit. 

Collective  Nouns  with  Plural  Constructions. 

1972.  Collective  nouns  can  always  be  regarded  as  logically 
equivalent  to  plurals  of  individual  nouns,  and  hence  are  often 
ungrammatically  associated  with  words  that  imply  plurality : 
twenty  people,  these  vermin,  many  cattk,  a  few  cavalry,  the  clergy 
took  their  seats,  two  or  three  counsel  who  were  never  in  any 
cause  (Dickens).  We  also  find  singular  constructions :  much 
cattle,  much  people  (Bible). 

1073.  There  is  often  hesitation  in  joining  such  words  to 
numerals.  This  is  especially  the  case  when  there  are  distinct 
individual  nouns  by  the  side  of  the  collective  ones  {clergyman 
by  the  side  of  clergy),  as  in  twenty  clergy  walking  in  pro- 
cession ;  here  the  collective  is  preferred  because  it  implies  that 
it  was  not  a  fortuitous  assemblage  of  clergymen,  but  that  they 
walked  in  the  procession  through  being  members  of  one 
organization. 

1974.  The  inconvenience  of  not  having  an  individual  noun 
corresponding  to  such  collectives  as  cattle  and  game  has  led 
to  the  use  of  head  ^ .  . ,  as  in  «  head  of  cattle,  twenty  head  of 
game,  where  head  is  the  unchanged  plural  of  measure. 

The  old  collective /?/>&  (Old-English  neuter  yi?/^  *  nation ')  was 
at  first  used  in  the  plural  only  in  the  sense  of  peoples— that  is 
'nations'— but  in  Modern  English  folks  came  to  be  used  in  the 
sense  of  persons,  as  in  the  oldfolk{s)  at  home,  folk{s)  say.  The 
word  is  now  almost  obsolete. 

Changes  of  Meaning  in  Plural. 

1975.  Some  classes  of  words  are  rarely  used  in  the  plural 
unless  they  at  the  same  time  undergo  some  change  of 
meaning. 


§i98o.J  NOUNS:    NUMBER.  47 

1976.  Proper  names  can  be  used  in  the  plural  in  their 
literal  meaning  only  when  they  have  been  applied  to  more 
than  one  individual  [the  Tarquins)^  although  they  can  always 
have  a  plural  when  used  figuratively  :  the  Drydens  of  the 
present  day. 

1977.  Material  nouns  in  their  literal  meaning  are  used  in 
the  plural  to  denote  difference  of  kind  or  quality :  French 
wines.  But  they  are  also  used  in  the  plural  with  change  of 
meaning  to  imply  individual  nouns  denoting  some  definite 
object,  as  in  the  leads  of  a  house  meaning  *  sheets  of  lead/ 
irons  meaning  *  fetters  of  iron/  So  also  colours  =  *  flag ' 
implies  a  combination  of  different  colours.  In  such  expres- 
sions as  sands  =  '  sandy  beach/  the  waters  of  the  Nile,  ^the 
dews  of  heaven  there  is  no  suggestion  of  definite  parts,  and 
the  plural  seems  to  suggest  indefinite  extension  or  repetition. 

1978.  Abstract  nouns  are  not  often  used  in  the  plural  in 
their  literal  meaning,  although,  of  course,  there  is  nothing  to 
prevent  them  from  being  so  used  when  necessary  :  a  man  of 
abilities,  a  thousand  pities.  But  they  often  undergo  changes 
of  meaning  when  so  used,  as  in  pay  respects,  do  the  honours, 
in  good  spirits.  They  sometimes  even  become  concrete,  as 
in  spirits  of  wine,  forces  =  *  army,'  effects,  sweepings  =  *  result 
of  sweeping,  what  is  swept  w^^  filings. 

Used  only  in  the  Plural. 

1979.  The  meaning  of  some  words  makes  them  more 
used  in  the  plural  than  in  the  singular.  Such  a  word  as 
twins,  indeed,  hardly  admits  of  a  singular,  although  we  do 
not  scruple  to  use  twin  in  the  sense  of  'one  of  a  pair  of 
twins.' 

1980.  There  are  other  words  which  are  used  in  the  plural 
to  imply  that  they  are  made  up  of  a  pair  of  parts,  such  as 
scissors,  bellows,  spectacles  (also  called  glasses).  These  words 
never  drop  the  plural  inflection.  The  resulting  difBculties 
are  evaded  by  the  paraphrase  pair  of .  .:  a  pair  of  bellows^ 


48  SYNTAX.  [§  1981. 

two  pairs  0/  spectacles.  When  such  plurals  imply  more  than 
two  component  parts,  as  in  gallows,  this  periphrasis  cannot 
be  used. 

1981.  Besides  those  plurals  which  cannot  drop  the  plural 
inflection  without  losing  their  distinctive  meaning,  such  as 
leads  and  spectacles^  there  are  many  words  used  only  in  the 
plural,  without  having  any  corresponding  word  in  the  singular, 
such  as  hustings,  sessions,  mathematics,  phonetics  and  the 
other  words  in  -ics,  some  of  which,  however,  are  now  occa- 
sionally used  in  the  singular  form,  such  as  meiric(s),  lecturer 
on  diplomatic. 

1982.  Most  of  these  plurals  are — occasionally  at  least — 
used  in  singular  constructions.  Even  with  pair-plurals  we 
find  such  constructions  as  a  silver  scissors.  The  use  of  the 
indefinite  article  is  quite  common  with  the  other  words : 
a  gallows,  a  hustings.  So  also  we  can  say  phonetics  is  . .  as 
well  as  phonetics  are  .  . 

1983.  So  also  some  of  these  words  can  be  used  in  definite 
plural  constructions :  two  gallows,  two  hustings. 

1984.  In  some  cases  when  a  plural  noun  has  singular 
meaning  it  is  converted  into  a  singular  noun.  The  test  of 
complete  conversion  is  that  it  can  take  a  fresh  plural  inflec- 
tion :  two  sixpences.  In  such  examples  as  what  is  the  news  ?  \ 
to  take  much  pains  there  is  only  half  conversion. 

For  apparent  plurals  see  §  998  a. 


Cases. 

Common  Case. 

1985.  The  common  case  is  used  to  express  the  subject, 
the  direct  and  indirect  object,  and  the  vocative  relation : 
John  I,  that  man  gave  your  brother  a  book.  In  Old-English 
the  first  two  nouns  in  this  sentence  would  be  in  the  nomina- 
tive, the  third  in  the  dative,  the  fourth  in  the  accusative.    In 


§1989.]  NOUNS:   CASES.  49 

combination  with  prepositions  it  represents  historically  the 
Old-English  accusative,  dative,  instrumental,  or  genitive,  and 
has  in  Modern  English  a  neutral  function,  being  regarded 
neither  as  a  direct  nor  an  indirect  object,  but  rather  as  stand- 
ing in  a  non-subject  relation,  or — more  definitely — as  being 
converted  into  an  adverb. 

Common  case  =  dt'rgcf  object. 

1086.  Besides  its  purely  accusatival  function,  the  common 
case  is  used  to  express 

direotion :  they  went  the  same  way. 
space  :  three  inches  long,  one  storey  high. 
adverbial  relations :  he  would  be  satisfied  one  way  or 
another, 

1987.  It  also  has  in  the  spoken  language  a  purely  adjec- 
tival function :  it  is  no  use  \  you  would  not  think  those  two 
children  were  exactly  the  same  age  \  what  colour  shall  I  paint 
your  door  ?  [compare  paint  it  white']  \  ivaier  the  colour  of  pea- 
soup.  This  construction  apparently  began  through  dropping 
a  preposition,  for  we  can  still  say  in  the  above  examples  of 
no  use,  of  the  same  age,  with  what  colour.  It  may  then  have 
been  extended  to  other  constructions,  such  as  he  looks  his 
age. 

Common  case  =  indirect  object. 

1088.  The  dative  is  extensively  used  in  Old-English  not 
only  in  company  with  accusatives  after  verbs  of  giving,  etc., 
but  also  with  intransitive  verbs,  not  only  verbs  of  addressing — 
as  in  he  him  andwyrde  '  he  answered  him ' — but  also  of 
benefiting,  helping,  injuring  and  other  personal  relations,  as 
in  mannum  dorian  '  to  injure  men/ 

1989.  In  Modern  English  the  accusative  and  dative  have 
been  merged  into  one  case,  and  so  the  dative  after  originally 
intransitive  verbs  has  become  indistinguishable  from  the  old 
accusative,  and  has  come  to  be  felt  as  a  direct  rather  than 

VOL.  IL  E 


50  SYNTAX,  [§  1990. 

an  indirect  object,  as  in  he  answered  him,  he  answered  the 
question. 

1990.  In  fact,  in  Modern  English  the  common  case  cannot 
be  recognized  as  an  indirect  object  unless  accompanied  by 
another  common  case  serving  as  a  direct  object,  from  which  it 
is  distinguished  solely  by  position  (1823),  so  that  the  relation 
is  always  liable  to  become  ambiguous  when  it  is  not  accom- 
panied by  an  accusatival  word,  or  when  removed  from  its 
normal  position.  In  such  cases  the  '  prepositional  dative  * 
with  to  is  substituted,  as  in  /  will  write  to  him  about  it  com- 
pared with  /  will  write  him  a  letter  \  to  the  devout  believer  the 
Church  promised  pardons  instead  of  the  Church  promised  the 
devout  believer  pardons. 

1991.  But  in  many  cases  the  context  enables  us  to  recog- 
nize an  isolated  or  displaced  common  case  as  an  indirect 
object  on  purely  logical,  not  formal,  grounds,  as  in  the 
archaic  woe  is  me !  \  me,  poor  man,  my  library  was  dukedom 
large  enough  (Shakespeare).  The  unmistakably  datival  func- 
tion of  the  pronoun  in  /  will  write  you  is  probably  the  cause 
of  this  construction — which  occurs  throughout  the  Modern 
English  period — being  avoided  by  many  who  would  not 
object  to  it  if  it  were  possible  to  regard  it  as  a  direct  object. 

1992.  So  also  the  common  case  after  adjectives  and 
adverbs  of  nearness  and  likeness — which  is  a  direct  descen- 
dant of  an  Old-English  dative — is  still  felt  rather  as  an 
indirect  than  as  a  direct  object,  as  shown  by  the  frequent 
substitution  of  the  prepositional  dative :  he  sat  near  the  fire 
[Old-English:  neah  pcem  fyre\  \  to  wear  flannel  next  the  skin 
[Old -English  :  niehstpcBre  hyde\  \  unlike  one  another  compared 
with  come  nearer  to  the  fire  I  \  I  sat  next  {to)  him  at  dinner  \ 
like  to  or  "^unto  .  . 

1993.  But,  on  the  other  hand,  the  adjectives  and  adverbs 
of  nearness  are  felt  to  be  almost  or  quite  identical  with  pre- 
positions, near  the  fire,  next  him  having  the  same  meaning  as 
by  the  fire,  beside  him  (or  by  his  side),  and  this  conception 


§  1996.]  NOUNS :    CASES,  5I 

may  be  extended  to  like,  although  here  there  is  no  analogous 
preposition. 

1894.  Even  when  two  common-case  words  come  together, 
the  construction  is  sometimes  doubtful. 

Thus  in  Old-English,  verbs  of  teaching  originally  took 
two  accusatives,  as  in  he  Ictrde  hine  crceftas  '  he  taught  him 
arts.*  In  Modern  English  we  can  isolate  the  first  object- 
word  {he  taught  him)^  which  therefore  ought  to  be  regarded 
as  a  direct  object ;  but,  on  the  other  hand,  such  transpositions 
as  ito  him  my  tale  I  teach  (Coleridge)  show  that  we  regard  it 
as  an  indirect  object — at  least,  when  associated  with  another 
object-word.  That  this  feeling  is  historically  correct  is  shown 
by  the  fact  that  in  the  later  Old-English  a  dative  of  the 
person  is  generally  substituted  for  the  original  accusative :  he 
lardt  him  crce/tas.  In  he  struck  him  a  blow  \  he  struck  the 
desk  a  blow  we  do  not  feel  the  first  object-word  to  be  datival, 
as  we  would  in  he  gave  him  a  blow^  but  rather  as  a  direct 
object  followed  by  what  in  inflected  languages  would  be 
a  cognate  accusative.  In  such  constructions  as  /*/  will  last 
him  his  life-time  \  to  stare  one  in  the  face  the  datival  character 
of  the  first  object-word  is  more  marked,  because  neither  of 
the  verbs  is  transitive,  as  in  the  two  preceding  examples. 

1995.  It  is  to  be  observed  that  many  verbs  take  to  just 
as  they  might  take  any  other  preposition,  not  as  a  substitute 
for  the  dative.  Thus  the  to  in  speak  to  is  derived  from  the 
Old-English  construction  he  cwcep  to  him,  he  sprcec  to  him 
contrasted  with  the  dative  in  he  him  andwyrde.  But  it  was 
of  course  through  the  analogy  of  such  constructions  that  to 
came  to  be  used  as  a  substitute  for  the  older  dative.  The 
non-datival  is  distinguished  from  the  datival  to  by  its  never 
allowing  the  substitution  of  the  common  case. 

Genitive. 

1996.  In  Old-English  any  noun  could  be  made  into  an 
adjunct-word  by  being  put  in  the  genitive ;  but  in  Modern 

£    2 


52  SYNTAX,  [§ 


1997. 


English  the  genitive  is  restricted  mainly  to  nouns  denoting 
living  beings,  its  place  being  otherwise  taken  by  the  'pre- 
positional genitive,'  formed  by  the  preposition  of,  as  in  at 
the  foot  of  a  mountain  compared  with  a  maris  foot. 

1997.  The  introduction  of  the  prepositional  genitive  was 
no  doubt  prepared  by  such  Old-English  constructions  as  pa 
m§nn  of  Lundenbyrig  fetodon  J?d  siipu  'the  men  of  (coming 
from)  London  fetched  the  ships.' 

1998.  In  Old-English  the  genitive  was  also  used,  like  an 
accusative,  to  denote  the  object  of  a  verb  such  as  gemunan 
*  remember,'  giernan  '  desire,'  often  with  an  accompanying 
accusative  or  dative  of  the  person :  htm  wcbs  oftogen  ctltes 

fodan  *  they  were  deprived  of  all  food.'  This  survives  only 
in  the  form  of  constructions  with  the  prepositional  genitive 
(think  of  deprive  of),  which  may  however  in  these  instances 
have  developed  independently  of  Old-English  traditions. 

1999.  The  non-personal  genitive  is  still  frequent  with 
nouns  of  time,  as  in  a  days  journey,  a  minutes  notice,  one 
week's  pay,  and  of  space,  as  in  he  arrived  at  his  journey's 
end,  a  spear's  length,  and  in  a  few  isolated  constructions  such 
as  the  sun's  rays,  the  waters'  meet,  which  almost  constitute 
compounds.  Otherwise  only  in  the  higher  style:  Albion's 
sons,  an  empire's  dust,  music's  voice. 

2000.  The  use  of  the  personal  genitive  itself  is  limited. 
Thus  the  genitive  in  combination  with  transitive  phenomenon- 
words  is  generally  used  only  subjectively,  not  objectively — 
that  is,  a  mother  s  love,  a  father  s  care  imply  that  the  love  and 
care  proceed  from  the  parents,  not  that  they  are  the  objects 
of  it.  The  objective  relation  is  expressed  by  the  pre- 
positional genitive,  as  in  the  love  of  God  compared  with 
Gods  love. 

2001.  In  many  instances  both  genitives  may  be  used,  the 
prepositional  genitive  being  sometimes  preferred  in  order  to 
avoid  awkward  or  ambiguous  collocations,  especially  when 
a  genitive-group  is  preceded  by  other  modifiers. 


§2oo8.]  NOUNS:    CASES.  53 

2002.  When  adjective  +  noun  is  preceded  by  general 
adjectives,  the  latter  necessarily  modify,  not  the  adjective, 
but  the  noun — or,  rather,  the  whole  group.  But  if  genitive  + 
noun  is  preceded  by  general  adjectives,  the  latter  are  neces- 
sarily associated  with  the  genitive  rather  than  the  head-noun, 
as  in  fhe  king's  son  =  i/ie  son  of  the  king  compared  with  the 
royal  youth. 

2003.  Of  course,  if  the  genitive  is  so  closely  associated 
with  the  head-noun  as  to  form  a  sort  of  compound  with 
it  (893),  then  the  modifier  is  associated  with  the  head- 
word or  the  whole  group,  as  in  two  lady^ s-maids^  a  law- 
yer's clerk,  that  butchers  shop  (:t53et  butjaz  /op).  In  the 
last  example  the  that  may  be  associated  with  the  geni- 
tive, but  in  this  case  the  stress  is  thrown  on  to  it;  (tJaet 
ibutj^z  Jop). 

2004.  It  is  also  to  be  noted  that  the  genitive  seems  to  be 
less  freely  used  in  the  plural  than  in  the  singular,  because 
the  genitive  plural  is  indistinguishable  in  most  words  from 
the  common  plural ;  thus  the  meeting  of  the  lovers  is  clearer 
than  the  lovers^  meeting. 

2005.  The  use  of  the  two  forms  is  sometimes  a  matter  of 
emphasis.  Thus  the  answer  to  the  question  is  he  of  good 
family  ?  might  be  he  is  the  son  of  a  baronet,  while  if  the 
baronet  had  just  been  mentioned,  we  should  speak  of  his  son 
as  the  baronefs  (eldest)  son. 

2006.  But  there  are  many  cases  in  which  only  the  genitive 
is  admissible.  Thus  in  such  a  sentence  as  where  is  fohns 
hat?  we  could  no  more  substitute  of  fohn  than  we  could 
substitute  of  me  for  my. 

2007.  Genitives  can  be  used  absolutely  without  any 
prop-word:  he  neglects  his  own  business  to  look  after  other 
peoples. 

2008.  Hence  has  arisen  the  elliptical  genitive,  which 
requires  some  such  word  as  *  house '  to  be  supplied,  not  from 
the  context — which  would  give  simply  an  absolute  genitive — 


54  SYNTAX.  [§  2009. 

but  from  the  sense  :  «/  /he  baker's  {shop)  \  to  dine  at  JBrookes's 
{club). 

2009.  The  predicative  use  of  the  (absolute)  genitive 
is  hardly  colloquial:  his  purse  and  his  heart  were  every- 
body'Sy  and  his  friends*  as  much  as  his  own  \  Heavens  is  the 
quarrel/ 

2010.  The  pleonastic  genitive,  as  in  he  is  a  friend  0/ my 
brother* Sy  is  generally  partitive  =  *  one  of  the  friends  of  my 
brother*;  he  is  a  friend  of  my  brother  v/ould  imply  'he  is 
friendly  towards  my  brother.'  But  the  construction  is  extended 
to  non-partitive  instances,  as  in  this  fortune  of  my  poor  sisters 
is  old  Radford's  object.  The  main  reason  for  keeping  it  up 
is  to  avoid  the  prepositional  genitive  of  personal  nouns. 
This  applies  still  more  to  the  parallel  construction  a  friend 
of  mine  (2114). 

ARTICLES. 

2011.  The  definite  and  indefinite  articles  are  both  mark- 
words — they  single  out  an  individual  (229).  Hence  they  are 
most  used  with  concrete  class-nouns.  The  absence  of  the 
articles  thus  becomes  a  distinguishing  feature  of  other  classes 
of  nouns,  such  as  proper  names.  The  absence  of  the  articles 
has  also  more  purely  grammatical  functions,  as  when  it  is 
used  to  mark  the  vocative  relation.  We  may  of  course 
reverse  the  statement  by  saying  that  the  presence  of  the 
articles  has  the  negative  function  of  showing  that  the  word 
is  not  a  proper  name  or  a  vocative. 

2012.  It  follows  from  the  definition  of  proper  names  and 
material  nouns  4;hat  they  are  from  a  strictly  logical  point  of 
view  incapable  of  being  used  in  the  plural.  Hence  the  mere 
fact  of  a  noun  being  used  in  the  plural  is  enough,  as  a 
general  rule,  to  stamp  it  as  a  class-noun ;  so  that,  if  a  noun 
in  the  plural  has  not  the  definite  article,  we  naturally  assume 
it  to  be  the  plural  of  an  undefined  class-noun — that  is,  a 


§aoi6.]  ARTICLES:    DEFINITE   ARTICLE.  55 

class-noun  accompanied  by  the  indefinite  article.  Hence 
a  noun  in  the  plural  without  any  article  corresponds  gram- 
matically to  a  noun  in  the  singular  with  an  indefinite  article, 
not  to  a  noun  without  an  article:  men  is  the  plural  not  of 
man  but  of  a  man. 

Definite  Article. 

For  its  position — the  whole  day^  all  the  day — see  §  1792. 

2013.  In  Old-English  the  definite  article  se  still  has  also 
the  function  of  a  demonstrative,  and  in  Modern  English  its 
neuter  kcet  has  become  the  purely  demonstrative  that,  which 
is  now  completely  disassociated  from  the  article. 

Referring  Back. 

2014.  In  its  purely  grammatical  function  the  definite 
article  is  put  before  a  noun  to  show  that  the  idea  expressed 
by  the  noun  has  been  already  stated,  and  to  refer  back  to 
that  statement.  If,  on  the  other  hand,  the  idea  is  new,  the 
noun  expressing  it  is  accompanied  by  the  indefinite  article. 
Thus  in  the  fable  of  the  wolf  and  the  dog,  the  two  animals 
are  introduced  at  first  as  a  wolf,  a  dog,  and  are  then  spoken 
of  as  the  wolf,  the  dog :  one  night  a  wolf  fell  in  with  a  dog. 
the  wolf  was  all  skin  and  bones,  while  the  dog  was  as  fat  as 
he  could  be. 

2016.  The  noun  referred  to  is  not  necessarily  marked  by 
the  indefinite  article ;  thus  the  men  may  refer  to  some  men  or 
three  men.  The  noun  referred  to  may  also  be  a  different 
word  altogether ;  thus  the  man  may  refer  to  your  friend  or  to 
a  proper  name. 

2016.  In  some  cases  the  noun  referred  to — especially  if 
it  is  a  material  noun  or  a  proper  name — may  be  without  any 
assumptive :  when  earth  is  washed  into  a  river  by  the  rain, 
the  earth  sinks  to  the  bottom  of  the  river  and  becomes  mud. 
It  is  to  be  noted  that  the  meaning  of  the  material  noun  is  in. 


56  SYNTAX.  [§ 


2017. 


this  instance  not  modified  in  any  way  by  the  article,  as  it  is 
in  such  a  sentence  as  the  earth  is  round. 

2017.  In  Old-English  the  repetition  of  a  proper  name  may 
be  marked  in  the  same  way :  he  wolde  ddr&fan  dnne  CBpelingy 
se  wcBS  Cyneheard  hdten^  and  se  Cyneheard  wees  pcBS  Sige- 
bryhtes  brdpor  *  he  wished  to  expel  a  noble  who  was  called 
Cyneheard,  and  (this)  Cyneheard  was  the  brother  of  (the  above- 
mentioned)  Sigebryht/  In  Modern  English  we  have  given 
up  this  usage,  probably  because  of  the  ambiguity  that  would 
arise  from  such  collocations  as  the  baker  {the  Baker) — a  more 
serious  ambiguity  than  that  which  arises  from  the  use  of  the 
definite  article  with  material  nouns  {the  earth).  Hence  if  we 
wish  expressly  to  mark  the  repetition  of  a  proper  name, 
we  use  some  other  demonstrative,  or  insert  some  adjective 
{this,  the  above-mentioned). 

2018.  When  used  for  back-reference,  the  definite  article 
requires  another  (preceding)  sentence  to  complete  the  meaning. 
In  all  the  following  usages  it  is  merely  a  word-modifier. 

Identifying. 

2019.  In  the  sentences  given  in  §  2016  the  in  the  river  has 
only  the  grammatical  function  of  referring  back  to  a  river ^ 
which,  so  far  from  denoting  one  particular  river,  practically 
expresses  the  idea  *  river  in  general.'  But  when  London 
people  talk  of  the  river,  meaning  *  the  most  important  river 
near  us,'  the  definite  article  identifies  the  river  almost  as 
unmistakably  as  the  proper  name  Thames  does.  So  also 
the  king,  the  lord-mayor,  the  street  may  imply  a  proper  name. 
Similarly,  the  door,  the  window  implying  the  door  or  window 
of  the  room  the  speaker  is  in  or  is  thinking  of,  and  the  horses 
means  *  our  two  or  more  horses.' 

2020.  In  have  they  a  father  ?  no,  the  father  is  dead,  but  the 
mother  is  alive  the  definite  article  does  not  refer  back  to  the 
preceding  a  father,  but  is  purely  identifying,  being  equivalent 
to '  their.'     In  some  cases  the  definite  article  may  be  regarded 


§  ao25.]  ARTICLES :   DEFINITE  ARTICLE.  57 

as  a  direct  substitute  for  a  possessive  pronoun  :  these  animals 
have  the  tail  tipped  with  hair  |  shall  I  take  a  little  off  the  beard, 
sir  ?  (said  by  a  hair-cutter). 

2021.  With  collective  plurals  such  as  birds,  trees,  stars  the 
definite  article  has  almost  a  demonstrative  meaning.  With- 
out the  article  such  a  plural  as  birds  expresses  the  idea  of 
*  birds  in  general,'  while  the  birds  implies  *  the  birds  around  us 
or  near  us/  as  in  the  birds  are  singing  \  the  stars  are  bright 
to-night  compared  with  birds  do  not  sing  in  the  winter  \  stars 
shine  by  night. 

2022.  Although  we  use  the  indefinite  article  in  such 
phrases  as  a  story  about  a  wolf  and  a  dog,  we  substitute  the 
definite  article  in  the  title  of  the  story— />i^  wolf  and  the  dog — 
meaning  *  the  well-known  story '  or  '  the  story  you  are  about 
to  hear.' 

2023.  The  presence  of  another  modifier  need  not  affect 
the  meaning  of  the  identifying  article.  Thus  the  old  horse 
may  mean  '  our  single  old  horse.*  In  this  case  the  adjective 
is  purely  descriptive.  But  this  collocation  may  also  imply 
that  the  speaker  has  two  horses,  and  that  he  adds  old  to  show 
which  of  the  two  he  means  (32).  So  also  in  the  front  door, 
the  hall  door,  the  man  who  was  here  yesterday.  In  this  case, 
therefore,  the  article  and  the  adjective  share  the  function  of 
identifying  between  them,  while  in  the  meaning  first  given  it 
is  the  article  alone  that  identifies. 

2024.  If  we  define  the  queen,  the  river  as  the  reigning  queen j 
the  nearest  river ^  the  article  becomes  superfluous  as  an  identi- 
fier, for  there  can  be  only  one  queen  at  a  time,  and  only  one 
river  can  be  nearest.  So  also  mthe  emperor  Napoleon,  the  first 
month  of  the  year,  the  same  man.  In  such  cases  the  article 
is  added  on  the  analogy  of  cases  where  the  other  modifier 
identifies  only  partially. 

2025.  But  the  article  is  by  no  means  grammatically 
superfluous  in  these  last  examples :  although  it  is  not  required 
as  an  identifier,  it  still  has  the  negative  function  of  showing 


58  SYNTAX.  "  [§aoa6. 

that  its  nouns  have  not  those  meanings  which  are  associated 
with  the  absence  of  the  definite  article. 

Absolutely  Defining. 

2026.  In  the  examples  last  given  the  article  has  only  a 
Hmited  sphere  of  identification.  Thus  it  is  only  to  those 
who  live  near  the  Thames  that  ^/le  river  means  that  special 
river;  in  other  places  *the  river'  may  be  the  Severn,  the 
Rhine,  the  Nile. 

2027.  But  in  some  cases  the  identifying  article  makes  the 
noun  into  what  is  practically  a  proper  name,  as  is  further 
indicated  in  writing  by  the  use  of  capitals :  the  Lord,  the  Scrip- 
tures, the  Flood,  the  City  (that  part  of  London  so  called),  the 
Holy  Ghost.  The  following  are  still  more  marked  examples, 
in  which  the  group  becomes  a  full  proper  name  :  the  Victory 
(name  of  a  ship),  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope, 

Class-  and  Collective. 

2028.  In  the  following  examples  the  definite  article  is 
used  with  a  single  class-noun  to  suggest  the  idea  of  belonging 
to  or  representing  a  class :  he  looks  quite  the  [or  ci\  gentleman  \ 
to  play  the  fool  =  to  behave  like  a  fool  \  the  man  in  the  street  = 
*  the  average  human  being '  |  the  lion  is  the  king  of  beasts*  As 
we  see,  the  definite  article  when  used  in  this  way  has  so  little 
distinctive  meaning  that  the  indefinite  article  may  be  substi- 
tuted for  it  with  hardly  any  change  of  meaning.  But,  never- 
theless, the  definite  article  is  more  emphatic.  It  emphasizes 
a  quality  (the  gentleman),  or  makes  the  individuals  of  a  class 
more  prominent :  the  man,  the  lion  make  us  think  of  indi- 
vidual men  and  lions.  In  fact,  the  word  king  makes  it  impos- 
sible for  us  to  think  of  more  than  one  lion,  although  we  know 
that  the  statement  is  meant  to  apply  (figuratively)  to  lions  in 
general. 

Such  phrases  as  play  the  fool  may  have  been  originally 
theatrical =*  play  the  part  of  the  fool.' 


§203a.]  ARTICLES:   DEFINITE  ARTICLE,  59 

2029.  In  some  cases  the  idea  of  collectivity  predominates 
over  that  of  individuality,  as  in  ilord  of  the  fowl  and  the  brute. 

2030.  With  collective  nouns  and  plurals  the  definite  article 
emphasizes  the  idea  of  collectiveness,  suggesting  that  of '  the 
whole  body  of .  .  ,'  as  in  the  nobility  and  gentry  \  the  dissenters 
and  catholics  \  the  Russians  do  not  like  the  Germans. 

Unique  Article. 

2031.  When  the  definite  article  is  used  with  nouns  express- 
ing persons  or  things  which  are  unique  in  themselves,  it  has 
of  course  only  a  negative  function : — 

{a)  the  Messiah,  the  Devil  [a  devil  in  a  different  sense], 
the  Bible.     Some  of  these  are  almost  proper  nouns. 

{b)  the  sun,  the  moon. 

(c)  the  earth,  built  on  the  rock^  the  sea,  the  sky  [a  bit  of  blue 
sky],  the  air.;  the  north  [to  steer  north,  the  wind  is  north]. 
Some  of  these  are  also  material  nouns,  and  the  definite  article 
is  peculiarly  distinctive  in  the  case  of  such  words  as  the  earth 
compared  with  earth  =  '  mould.'  iearth  =  the  earth  is  by  the 
analogy  of  heaven  :  heaven  and  earth  rejoiced.  For  on  earth 
see  §  2063. 

In  the  examples  under  {p)  and  (r)  the  article  seems  also  to 
have  a  demonstrative  force :  the  sun  =  *  the  sun  we  see,'  ihi 
earth  =  *this  earth/ 

In  these  cases  it  also  expresses  the  idea  of  extension  or 
universality — especially  when  there  is  a  corresponding  material 
word — and  hence  that  of  collectiveness,  though  in  a  different 
way  from  its  use  in  the  examples  in  the  last  section. 

(<f)  which  way  is  the  wind?  \  the  rain  fell  and  the  wind 
blew  I  the  dew  fell  \  the  tide  is  coming  in.  We  can  also  use 
the  indefinite  article  in  such  phrases  as  there  is  a  strong  wind  \ 
there  is  a  heavy  dew.  These  nouns  can  also  be  used  without 
any  article  in  a  more  abstract  sense,  as  if  they  were  material 
nouns :  rain  comes  from  the  clouds. 

2032.  they   came   on  the  Sunday  and  went  away  on  the 


6o  SYNTAX.  [§ao33. 

Monday  has  much  the  same  meaning  as  they  came  on  a  Sunday 
and  went  away  on  the  Monday,  although  in  the  former  the 
first  the  seems  to  suggest  the  idea  of  '  the  Sunday  which  was 
agreed  upon  '  or  something  similar.  The  second  the  in  both 
examples  refers  back  in  a  peculiar  way  to  the  preceding 
Sunday,  implying  '  the  immediately  following  .  / 

With  Abstract  Nouns. 

2033.  The  definite  article  is  often  used  pleonastically  with 
names  of  diseases :  to  have  the  scarlet  fever  \  I  have  got  the 
rheumatism  very  bad  compared  with  to  catch  cold,  to  die  of 
consumption.  The  article  might  be  omitted  in  the  first  two 
examples  as  well.  The  indefinite  article  may  also  be  used  in 
some  cases  (I have  got  a  bad  cold — afresh  cold)  to  suggest 
the  idea  of  an  isolated  case.  The  definite  article,  on  the 
other  hand,  has  a  generalizing  meaning,  often  implying  that 
there  is  an  epidemic  {the  cholera,  the  influenza). 

2034.  The  definite  article  in  tell  the  truth,  on  the  other 
hand,  suggests  the  idea  of  *the  true  details  of  the  present 
case.* 

With  Proper  Names. 

2035.  The  article  in  such  collocations  as  the  other  Smithy 
meaning  '  the  other  man  whose  name  is  Smith,'  requires  no 
comment. 

2036.  The  collective  article  in  the  Germans  has  been 
already  considered  (2030).  It  is  similarly  used  with  the 
plural  of  family  names,  as  in  the  Smiths,  meaning  '  the  Smith 
family.' 

2037.  Sometimes  the  definite  article  is  added  to  proper 
names  without  affecting  their  meaning  or  function  in  any 
way — oftener  with  geographical  than  with  personal  names : 
the  Thames  \i father  Thames'],  the  Atlantic^  the  Crimea;  the 
Douglas.  We  have  an  instinctive  feeling  that  the  Thames  is 
short  for  the  river  Thames,  although  in  Old-English  Tgmes  is 


§  ao42.]       ARTICLES :   INDEFINITE  ARTICLE.  6l 

used  without  any  article.  The  definite  article  is  regularly 
added  to  plural  proper  names,  where  it  is  collective  :  the 
(West)  Indies,  the  Orkneys,  the  Alps,  the  Grampians;  the 
Perctes,  the  Gracchi. 

This  use  of  the  definite  article  is  the  direct  opposite  of  its 
use  to  make  an  ordinary  noun  into  the  equivalent  of  a  proper 
name  (2027). 

With  Absolute  Adjectives. 

2038.  In  Old-English  the  definite  article  is  more  freely 
used  than  in  Modern  English  in  a  class-  and  collective  sense 
and  with  abstract  nouns,  as  in  se  mann  *man  (in  general)/ 
}>d  godan  mptn  *  good  men  (in  general).'  In  Old-English  pa 
gbdan  by  itself  is  used  in  the  same  sense,  whence  the  Modern 
English  the  good  compared  with  good  men, 

2039.  In  such  constructions  as  I  will  do  the  best  I  can\ 
the  true  and  the  beautiful  the  article  is  necessary  to  show  that 
besty  true  are  nouns  and  not  adjectives  or  adverbs.  So  also 
in  the  Pacific  {ocean). 

2040.  Although  we  do  not  use  any  article  with  proper 
names   denoting   languages — to  learn    French,  to   translate 

from  German  into  English — we  use  the  definite  article  in 
such  phrases  as  a  book  translated  from  the  German^  where  the 
article  seems  to  suggest  *  the  German  original.' 

Indefinite  Article. 

For  the  position  t)f  the  indefinite  article  see  §  1793. 

2041.  In  Old-English  the  numeral  an  *  one '  is  used  both 
as  a  noun  and  an  adjective  in  the  vague  sense  of  *  a  certain 
(one),'  sum  '  some '  being  used  in  the  same  way :  sum  mann 
or  an  mann  *  a  certain  man.'  As  an  in  such  collocations  is 
less  emphatic  than  sum^  its  meaning  is  often  weakened  till  it 
has  the  function  of  the  indefinite  article,  which,  however,  is 
often  not  expressed  at  all,  especially  in  the  earlier  period. 

2042.  Although    in    Modern  English   one  and   a   have 


62  SYNTAX.  [§  2043. 

diverged  so  much  through  phonetic  change  that  we  no  longer 
feel  any  connexion  between  them,  we  still  use  a  in  its 
original  numerical  sense  in  such  phrases  as  a  foot  deep^  not 
a  wordy  in  a  minute,  in  all  of  which  we  could  substitute  the 
slightly  more  emphatic  one  without  change  of  meaning.  This 
is  the  result  of  confusion  between  strong  on  and  weak  an  in 
Middle  English  before  they  had  been  completely  isolated  from 
one  other.  As  the  indefinite  article  always  implies  oneness, 
it  is  often  doubtful  whether  a  definite  numerical  meaning 
ought  to  be  assigned  to  it.  Thus  in  seven  days  make  a  week 
we  could  substitute  one,  but  as  there  is  no  special  contrast 
implied  between  one  week  and  two  weeks,  etc.,  it  is  safer  to 
regard  the  numerical  meaning  as  negative  or  secondary. 
The  indefinite  article  proper  has  two  distinct  functions : — 

2043.  The  introductory  article  singles  out  the  idea  ex- 
pressed by  its  noun,  and  makes  us  expect  further  information 
about  it :  once  upon  a  time  there  was  a  king  |  they  sailed  on 
till  they  came  to  an  island.  It  may  be  made  more  emphatic 
by  adding  certain :  a  certain  friend  of  mine  \  t  a  certain  man 
went  up  to  ferusalem. 

2044.  The  absolute  article  does  not  single  out,  and  has 
the  purely  indefinite  sense  of  *any.'  In  it  the  numerical 
meaning  is  reduced  to  a  minimum;  it  simply  picks  out  an 
individual  at  random  to  serve  as  the  representative  of  a  class : 
a  poets  eye  \  the  earth  is  like  a  hall  \  a  hill  is  the  opposite  of 
a  valley.  A  noun  accompanied  by  this  article  may  be  put  in 
the  plural  without  change  of  meaning:  hills  are  the  opposite 
of  valleys. 

2045.  In  this  last  example  a  hill  has  plural  hills  (2012). 
But  if  the  indefinite  article  distinctly  implies  oneness,  the 
plural  must  be  accompanied  by  some  numerative  word.  In 
the  absence  of  such  words  as  three,  many,  few,  the  vague 
words  some  or  any  are  used :  they  sailed  on  till  they  came  to 
some  islands  (or  a  group  of  islands)  \  did  they  see  any  islands? 
It  will  be  observed  that  some  in  this  usage  has  something  of  the 


§2052.]  ARTICLES :   ARTICLES  OMITTED.  63 

defining  force  of  the  introducing  article  ;  thus  /  have  brought 
you  some  flowers  implies  'the  flowers  I  have  in  my  hand/ 
while  the  bare  plural  in  he  t's  always  bringing  us  flowers 
implies  '  flowers  in  general.' 

2046.  The  distributive  use  is  a  special  development  of  the 
numerical :  /'/  costs  two  shillings  a  pound^  where  a  =  *  each/ 
The  definite  article  is  also  used :  two  shillings  the  pound. 

2047.  The  indefinite  article  in  combination  with  abstract 
nouns  has  a  very  vague  meaning,  and  hence  can  sometimes 
be  omitted  or  have  the  definite  article  substituted  for  it,  as  in 
to  catch  {a)  cold,  in  a  (or  the)  state  of  vapour. 

2048.  Verbs  of  naming  can  sometimes  take  the  name- 
noun  either  with  or  without  the  indefinite  article,  the  noun  in 
the  latter  case  being  a  sentence-word :  orange  is  the  colour  of 
the  fruit  called  (an)  orange.  The  article  could  not  be  so  well 
omitted  in  a  piece  of  land  with  water  all  round  it  is  called  an 
island. 

Articles  omitted. 

2049.  The  absence  of  the  articles  is  the  distinguishing 
mark  of  proper  names,  such  as  fohn,  Bakery  Mr.  Smith 
compared  with  tlie  baker ,  a  smith. 

2060.  The  articles  are  sometimes  omitted  from  class- 
nouns  which,  without  being  fully  converted  into  proper 
names,  are  regarded  as  such :  Scripture  or  Holy  Writ  says 
[but  the  Bible'].  Smith  the  baker  may  be  spoken  of  not  only 
as  Mr.  Smith,  but  also  as  Mr.  baker,  the  name  of  the  trade 
being  used  as  a  kind  of  proper  name.  So  also  a  cook  may 
be  spoken  of  as  cook  as  well  as  the  cook. 

2051.  Also  from  some  names  of  unique  objects  which  are 
not  otherwise  regarded  as  proper  names :  God  [but  the  God 
of  mercy,  the  god  of  war~\,  heaven,  hell,  paradise. 

2052.  The  absence  of  the  articles  is  also  the  mark  of 
material  nouns,  as  in  made  of  glass  compared  with  a  glass 
of  wine,  ^ 


64  SYNTAX,  [§  2053. 

2053.  The  omission  of  the  articles  from  such  words  as 
father^  mamma^  uncle  {John)  is  the  result  of  the  analogy  of 
proper  names  and  of  the  frequent  use  of  these  words  as 
vocatives  (2056). 

2054.  The  omission  from  such  words  as  parltameni, 
government  may  also  be  the  result  of  the  analogy  of  proper 
names,  or  of  personification. 

2055.  The  articles  are  often  omitted  from  names  of  meals, 
as  in  is  breakfast  ready  ?  \  dinner  will  he  ready  soon  compared 
with  /  had  a  heavy  breakfast  \  they  gave  a  dinner  in  his 
honour. 

2056.  From  a  grammatical  point  of  view  the  omission  of 
the  articles  is  the  mark  of  the  vocative  relation,  as  in  father  !, 
baker!.  Baker t  As  we  see,  this  usage  levels  the  distinction 
between  class-nouns  and  proper  names. 

2057.  Some  exclamations  follow  the  analogy  of  the 
vocative,  as  in  good  Godly  poor  fellow!  [but  what  a  shame!, 
thefool!\ 

2058.  The  omission  of  the  article  in  the  literal  use  of 
words,  as  in  how  do  you  spell  receive  r  \  if  is  a  conjunction^  is 
necessary. 

For  the  omission  of  the  articles  in  the  plural  of  undefined 
nouns  see  §  2012. 

2059.  Nouns  qualified  by  a  genitive  do  not  take  the 
articles  (except  when  the  combination  is  felt  as  a  compound), 
evidently  because  the  preceding  genitive  is  felt  to  define  them 
enough  by  itself,  as  in  metis  hearts,  the-mans  name  compared 
with  the  hearts  of  men,  the  name  of  the  man. 

2060.  There  is  a  tendency  to  use  nouns  predicatively  and 
in  apposition  without  any  article  on  the  analogy  of  adjec- 
tives :  he  became  king  [but  he  is  a  lawyer'],  he  turned  dissenter  \ 
Alfred,  king  of  England.  So  also  complementary  nouns,  as 
in  tliey  made  him  prisoner. 

2061.  The  absence  of  the  articles  is  in  most  cases  a 
tradition  of  ^  time  when  they  were  more  sparingly  used,  and 


§2o68.]  ADJECTIVES,  65 

ultimately  of  a  time — in  Parent  Germanic — when  there  were 
no  articles  at  all. 

2062.  Hence  in  some  cases  the  articles  are  omitted 
entirely  through  tradition  and  habit,  against  the  general 
tendencies  of  the  language,  but  of  course  only  in  special 
stereotyped  phrases  and  imitations  of  them,  which  were  pre- 
served from  change  by  their  great  frequency  or  development 
of  special  meanings. 

2063.  Thus  the  articles  are  omitted  in  many  preposition- 
groups  :  on  (dry)  land,  at  Christmas,  in  early  spring,  in  town, 
come  to  dinner,  up  stairs,  out  of  doors  contrasted  with  in  the 
country,  on  the  river. 

2064.  So  also  in  many  combinations  of  verb  +  direct 
object :  to  leave  school,  to  take  root,  to  send  word,  to  keep  open 
house  compared  with  to  send  a  message,  to  keep  a  school. 

2065.  In  some  cases,  on  the  other  hand.  Modern  English 
has  deliberately  discarded  the  definite  article. 

2066.  Thus  in  Old-English  it  was  extended,  as  in  Modern 
French  and  German,  to  abstract  nouns,  such  words  as 
*  wisdom '  keeping  it  even  when  personified :  seo  Gesdead- 
wisnes.  In  Modern  English  they  are  treated  like  material 
nouns,  such  wor<^s  as  ivisdom,  truth,  mercy,  victory  taking 
articles  only  when  used  in  some  special  meaning. 

2067.  The  use  of  such  nouns  as  man,  woman  without  an 
article  to  express  the  idea  of '  man  or  woman  in  general '  in 
such  a  sentence  as  man  is  weaker  than  [the)  animals  is  also 
of  later  growth,  for  in  Old-English  the  definite  article  would 
be  used :  se  mann  is  wdcraponne  pa  nietenu. 

ADJECTIVES. 

Absolute. 

2068.  When  two  assumptive  adjectives  are  joined  to  one 
noun,  the  three  generally  follow  in  immediate  succession,  as 
\n  your  poor  old  father.     But  the  first  may  be  detached  from 

VOL.  II.  F 


66  SYNTAX.  [§  2069. 

the  others,  often  by  a  conjunction  (good  and  bad  men,/air  or 
foul  means),  sometimes  by  a  longer  break :  never  do  by  foul, 
what  can  he  accomplished  by  fair  means. 

2069.  In  the  above  examples  the  first  adjective  is  merely 
detached  from  a  noun  which  follows  it.  If  the  second  adjec- 
tive is  separated  from  the  noun  by  being  put  after  it,  giving 
the  order  adjective  +  noun  .  .  +  adjective,  it  is  no  longer 
merely  detached,  it  is  absolute :  it  is  not  just  that  new  rules 
should  destroy  the  authority  of  the  old  (Dryden).  In  such  cases 
the  prop-word  one  is  generally  added  in  the  present  English — 
the  old  ones.  In  writing  we  often  repeat  the  noun,  to  avoid 
the  colloquial  one — the  old  rules.  Sometimes  the  colloquial 
association  may  be  destroyed  by  transposition,  as  in  many  of 
these  rooms  had  doors  which  led  into  the  one  adjacent. 

Free. 

2070.  The  use  of  free  adjectives  is  much  restricted  in  the 
present  English. 

2071.  In  good/  the  adjective  is  used  as  a  sentence- word, 
that  is,  it  is  nearly  converted  into  an  interjection. 

2072.  So  also  in  the  literary  language  an  adjective  may 
be  used  in  the  vocative  relation :  cruel,  dost  thou  forsake  us  ?  \ 
go  forth,  beloved  of  Heaven  ! 

2073.  Otherwise  a  free  adjective  must  be  preceded  by  the : 
the  good  =  '  good  people,'  *  what  is  good.' 

2074.  In  the  personal  sense  this  form  is  used  now  only 
in  plural  constructions  such  as  the  good  are  happy  \  the 
mighty  have  fallen  \  the  English  and  the  French.  Formerly 
it  was  used  freely  in  singular  constructions  also,  as  in  none 
but  the  brave  deserves  the  fair  (Dryden).  The  few  survivals 
of  this  usage,  such  as  the  betrothed,  the  deceased,  have  been 
converted  into  nouns :  the  deceased's  relatives  or  the  relatives 
of  the  deceased. 

2075*  The  the  is  occasionally  dropped  in  the  plural  con- 


§2o8i.]  ADJECTIVES:    COMPARISON.  6^ 

struction — especially  when  there  are  other  qualifiers — by 
the  analogy  of  the  construction  with  nouns,  but  only  in  the 
literary  language  :  older  and  abler  passed  you  by  (Gray)  |  ten 
righteous  would  have  saved  a  city  once  (Cowper). 

2076.  the  +  adjective  in  the  singular  neuter  sense  is  used 
not  only  in  such  phrases  as  the  good  and  the  beautiful, 
but  also  in  colloquial  phrases  such  as  to  do  the  needful^  to 
answer  in  the  affirmative. 

2077.  It  is  occasionally  used  with  names  of  languages,  as 
in  to  translate  from  the  French  (2040). 

2078.  Free  adjectives  often  occur  in  combination  with 
possessive  pronouns,  and  in  singular  constructions;  but  in 
most  cases  where  this  construction  is  still  preserved  the 
adjective  is  more  or  less  converted  into  a  noun:  Wd  my 
sweet  prepare  to  chide  \  '\his  distant  fair  \  her  betrothed.  In 
the  first  two  one  could  be  added.  This  construction  is 
especially  frequent  with  comparatives :  he  is  my  elder ^  my 
junior  \  his  superior,     my  dear  I  is  a  sentence-group. 

2079.  In  the  above  examples  the  adjective  is  in  the 
singular.  In  plural  constructions  -s  is  added — that  is,  the 
adjective  is  converted  into  a  noun :  our  better s,  his  superior s, 
my  dears  ! 

2080.  Most  of  those  which  are  in  colloquial  use  can  also 
take  'S  in  the  genitive  singular :  his  superior  s  orders. 

Comparison. 

2081.  In  Modern  English  there  is  a  tendency  to  use  the 
superlative  instead  of  the  comparative.  In  the  spoken 
language  we  always  naturally  speak  of  the  shortest  of  two 
roads,  the  biggest  of  the  two,  although  we  use  the  comparative 
in  careful  speech  and  in  writing.  But  in  such  a  sentence  as 
they  are  a  bad  pair  ;  but  she  is  the  worst  of  the  two  we  could 
not  substitute  the  comparative  without  weakening  the  force 
of  the  comparison,  she  is  the  worse  of  the  two  being  equivalent 

F  2 


68  SYNTAX.  [§ 

to  she  is  rather  the  worse  (or  worst)  of  the  two,  where  the 
comparative  may  be  used  even  in  colloquial  speech.  It  is 
therefore  probable  that  the  superlative  was  at  first  used  to 
strengthen  the  force  of  the  comparative,  implying  *  very  much 
more/  In  such  a  sentence  as  he  came  in  first  of  the  two  the 
superlative  can  hardly  be  avoided. 

2082.  In  all  the  above  instances  the  formal  distinction 
between  comparative  and  superlative  is  superfluous,  because 
the  number  of  objects  to  be  compared  is  shown  by  the  two. 
But  in  such  a  construction  as  the  younger  Miss  Pecksniff  = 
'  the  younger  of  the  two  Miss  Pecksniffs  '  a  careful  speaker 
would  keep  the  comparative,  because  the  superlative  would 
admit  the  possibility  of  there  being  more  than  two  Miss 
Pecksniffs,  although  a  careless  speaker  would  not  hesitate  to 
employ  it. 

2083.  In  some  traditional  phrases  the  comparative  is  used 
instead  of  the  superlative  :  the  latter  end,  the  latter  day,  utter 
contempt. 

Comparison  of  old. 

2084.  Of  the  two  comparisons  of  old,  the  irregular 
(original)  forms  elder,  eldest  have  the  more  limited  range — 
being  used  chiefly  to  distinguish  members  of  the  same  family 
— and  the  more  abstract  meaning,  for  they  imply  that  the 
distinctions  of  age  are  made  not  for  their  own  sake  but  as 
a  means  of  discrimination  and  identification.  The  new- 
formations  older,  oldest,  on  the  other  hand,  which  keep  the 
vowel  of  their  positive  unchanged,  directly  call  forth  the  ideas 
of  *  age '  or  *  long  duration.'  Thus  in  the  eldest  son  of  his 
oldest  friend,  the  son  may  be  a  young  boy,  and  the  word 
eldest  makes  us  think  of  a  connected  series  or  gradation ; 
while  oldest  deals  with  a  shifting  group  of  isolated  individuals, 
and  makes  us  think  more  or  less  of  the  characteristics  of  old 
age  or  long  duration. 

2085.  The  irregular  comparison,  in  fact,  makes  old  into 
a  mere  qualifier— we  might  almost  say  a  mark-word — the 


§ao90.]  ADJECTIVES:   COMPARISON.  69 

eldest  son  being  almost  equivalent  to  a  proper  name.  We  can 
express  the  difference  in  other  words  by  saying  that  elder  is 
practically  not  the  comparative  of  old,  but  the  opposite  of 
younger. 

2086.  Hence  the  irregular  forms  are  used  only  assump- 
tively — the  eldest  son,  an  elder  son,  her  three  eldest  daughters — 
not  predicatively,  except  with  the  definite  article  in  such 
constructions  as  he  is  the  elder  of  the  two  brothers  \  she  is  the 
eldest  of  the  family,  where  the  logical  predicate  is  not  elder, 
eldest,  but  an  understood  noun  of  relationship. 

2087.  If  no  the  precedes,  the  regular  forms  alone  can  be 
used  as  predicates :  he  is  five  years  older  \  he  is  much  older 
than  his  brother  \  my  elder  brother  is  five  years  older  than  I  am 
— than  me. 

2088.  But  with  the  definite  article  we  can  say  she  is  about 
four  years  the  elder  :=.  .  .  the  elder  of  the  two  sisters  instead  of 

the  more  usual  she  is  about  four  years  older.  The  use  of  the 
irregular  forms  in  such  cases  has  probably  been  kept  up  by 
the  analogy  of  the  constructions  given  in  §  2086. 

In  he  is  five  years  my  elder  the  adjective  is  felt  to  be  a  noun, 
not  merely  an  absolute  adjective. 

2089.  Even  the  assumptive  use  of  irregular  forms  is 
limited.  Thus  they  could  not  be  used  in  such  sentences  as 
the  following :  fohn  is  not  my  eldest  brother  ;  I  have  another 
older  brother  =  .  .  /  have  another  brother  who  is  older  than 
John.  Here  older  does  not  state  differences  of  age  with 
reference  to  a  fixed,  absolute  series  of  brothers,  but  picks  out 
two  brothers,  and  compares  them  as  if  they  were  strangers. 
Hence  the  practical  rule  that  the  regular  comparison  is 
necessary  whenever  the  comparison  is,  or  can  be,  defined  by 
a  group  or  sentence  introduced  by  than. 

2090.  The  irregular  comparison  is  not  restricted  to  family 
relations,  but  may  be  employed  with  reference  to  other 
personal  relations,  especially  those  of  a  more   permanent 


70  SYNTAX.  [§  ao9i. 

character  which  imply  gradations  of  rank  or  authority.  Thus 
in  the  elder  of  the  two  ladies  the  irregular  comparative  does 
not  necessarily  imply  that  the  ladies  are  sisters,  or  even 
mother  and  daughter ;  they  may  be  friends  living  together,  or 
merely  travelling  companions.  So  also  the  elder  boys  are 
expected  to  take  care  of  the  younger  ones  might  be  said  of 
schoolboys  as  well  as  brothers.  The  superlative  eldest  is  rare 
in  this  use. 

2091.  With  names  of  animals  we  can  speak  of  the  elder  of 
the  two  sheepdogs^  implying  a  pair  of  dogs  that  are  employed 
together.  When  appHed  to  animals  the  irregular  comparisons 
seem  not  only  not  to  imply  relationship,  but  almost  to 
exclude  it. 

2092.  In  all  the  examples  given  in  the  last  two  paragraphs 
the  regular  comparison  may  also  be  employed,  although  in 
some  cases  it  might  be  taken  to  involve  a  slight  change  of 
meaning  by  emphasizing  the  idea  of  old  age. 

2093.  The  irregular  comparisons  may  be  applied  to  other 
than  personal  nouns,  if  the  noun  suggests  personal  relations  : 
the  elder  generation  \  the  elder  branches  of  the  family.  Here, 
again,  the  regular  comparisons  may  be  substituted  with  hardly 
any  change  of  meaning. 

2094.  In  such  cases  as  the  following  the  irregular  com- 
parison is  rather  literary  or  archaic  than  colloquial :  our  elder 
writers  \  the  elder  inhabitants  \  the  elder  school  of  English  verse. 
It  need  hardly  be  said  that  as  the  irregular  comparisons  were 
originally  the  only  ones,  and  as  the  regular  ones  came  into 
use  only  slowly,  the  irregular  comparisons  were  in  the  earlier 
stages  of  Modern  English  used  in  many  of  the  constructions 
where  we  now  use  only  the  regular  ones. 


§ao97.]  PRONOUNS:   PERSONAL.  71 


PRONOUNS. 


Personal, 


2005.  we  is  used  instead  of  /  as  a  *  pronoun  (or  plural) 
of  majesty '  to  mark  the  supreme  authority  of  kings,  queens, 
reigning  dukes  and  other  persons  at  the  head  of  a  state.  We 
see  the  beginnings  of  this  usage  in  the  Old-English  laws, 
where  the  king  speaks  of  himself  as  tc,  and  then  goes  on  to 
say  we  bcheodap  .  .  *  we  command  .  . ,'  the  we  being  meant 
to  include  the  witan  or  councillors. 

2096.  we  is  also  used  instead  of  /—though  less  frequently 
now  than  formerly — by  the  author  of  a  book  in  addressing 
his  readers  in  order  to  avoid  the  egotism  of  a  singular  pro- 
noun. This  '  plural  of  modesty '  is  found  already  in  Old- 
English.  It  arose  probably  from  using  we  in  the  indefinite 
sense  of  *  myself  and  the  other  authorities  on  the  subject/ 
This  usage  occurs  also  in  colloquial  language,  as  when  a  boy 
says  give  us  some  I  meaning  '  give  me  some  ! ' 

Indefinite  Personal  Pronoun. 

2007.  In  Modern  English  the  place  of  the  indefinite  per- 
sonal pronoun  vian  has  been  taken  by  one,  but  in  the  spoken 
language  we  prefer  to  use  the  personal  pronoun  you,  and 
occasionally  we :  the  right  bank  of  a  river  is  on  your  right 
side  when  you  stand  with  your  face  to  its  source  \  when  people 
laugh,  we  know  they  are  pleased.  But  these  two  pronouns  can 
be  used  only  when  the  context  allows  us  to  take  them  more 
or  less  in  their  literal  meaning ;  thus  for  the  author  of  a  book 
abruptly  to  address  his  readers  z.syou  would  be  uncolloquial 
as  well  as  unliterary.     They  are,  of  course,  also  avoided  in 


72  SYNTAX.  [§2098. 

cases  where  taking  them  in  their  literal  meaning  would  involve 
some  great  change  of  meaning. 

2098.  In  many  cases  where  the  first  and  second  persons 
are  excluded  by  the  context,  the  third  person  plural  may  be 
used :  fhey  say  we  shall  have  a  hard  winter.  Here  neither 
you,  we  nor  one  could  be  used  without  changing  the  meaning; 
one  would  imply  *  people  are  in  the  habit  of  saying  that .  / 

Pleonastic. 

2099.  The  pleonastic  insertion  of  a  pronoun  after  a 
noun  in  the  subject-relation— /<?^«  he  says — occurs  only  as 
a  vulgarism  in  the  present  spoken  English,  or  as  the 
occasional  result  of  hesitation  or  carelessness,  but  is  frequent 
in  the  literary  language,  where  it  suggests  picturesqueness 
or  quaintness :  his  coat  it  was  all  of  the  greenwood  hue  \ 
a  frog  he  would  a-wooing  go. 

2100.  A  pronoun  may  also  be  made  pleonastic  by  tagging 
on  the  equivalent  noun.  This  is  frequent  in  the  spoken  as 
well  as  the  literary  language  :  he  was  a  wonderful  many  that 
uncle  of  yours  \  fit  ceased,  the  melancholy  sound. 

For  the  pleonastic  pronoun  with  the  imperative  see  §  1806. 

Gender. 

2101.  In  such  a  sentence  as  let  every  man  or  woman  do  as 
he  or  she  likes  the  group  he-or-she  is  used  as  a  sort  of  com- 
pound to  supply  the  want  of  a  personal  pronoun  of  the 
common  gender  in  the  singular  corresponding  to  the  plural 
they.    This  difficulty  is  evaded  in  various  ways. 

One  is  by  using  he  only,  leaving  the  application  of  the 
statement  to  women  as  well  as  men  to  be  taken  for  granted. 

In  the  spoken  language  the  difficulty  is  got  over  by  the 
use  of  the  genderless  plural  they :  let  every  one  do  just  what 
they  like  \  if  any  one  comes,  tell  them  to  wait  \  a  person  cannot 
help  their  birth. 


§aio7.]     PRONOUNS:    POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS.  73 

Prepositional  Genitive. 

2102.  The  prepositional  genitive  (of  me)  is  generally  used 
instead  of  the  possessive  {my)  in  the  objective  (2000)  meaning: 
/  cannot  bear  the  sight  of  him— of  it  \  I  will  change  my 
(subjective  genitive)  treatment  of  him. 

2103.  Its  subjective  use  in  not  for  the  life  of  me  I  is 
probably  due  to  the  analogy  of  it  will  be  the  death — the 
ruin — of  him,  where  it  is — or  may  be — felt  to  be  objective. 

2104.  Its  occasional  threatening  or  contemptuous  use  in 
such  phrases  as  /  will  break  the  neck  of  you  I  seems  to  be 
due  to  the  influence  of  those  dialects  which  distinguish 
between  the  mans  head  and  the  head  of  a  beast. 

Possessive  Pronouns. 

2105.  The  possessive  pronouns  are  used  not  only  sub- 
jectively but  also  objectively,  as  in  they  told  me  her  history  = 
*  what  was  told  of  her '  not  *  what  was  told  by  her.'  But  if 
the  noun  is  associated  in  meaning  with  a  transitive  verb,  the 
prepositional  genitive  is  used,  such  constructions  as  his 
murderer  =  '  the  man  who  murdered  him '  being  now 
exceptional. 

2106.  Possessives  are  sometimes  used  as  antecedents  to 
relative  pronouns,  as  in  inor  better  was  their  lot  who  fled. 
But  this  construction  hardly  occurs  in  the  spoken  language, 
which  either  avoids  the  relative  construction  or  else  sub- 
stitutes the  prepositional  genitive:  the  lot  of  those  who 
fled. 

2107.  Although  the  possessive  pronouns  no  more  neces- 
sarily imply  possession  than  the  genitive  case  does,  yet  it 
is  one  of  their  most  important  functions  to  do  so.  If  the 
idea  of  possession  is  excluded  by  the  context —so  that  there 
is  no  possible  ambiguity — they  are  freely  used  to  express 
a  variety  of  relations,  as  in  his /ear  of  his  mastery  where  the' 


74  SYNTAX.  [§aio8. 

relation  implied  by  both  possessives  is  the  exact  opposite  of 
that  of  subjective  possession. 

2108.  But  in  such  sentences  as  he  fought  three  duels,  and 
killed  his  man  each  time  \  that  boy  has  just  broken  his  fourth 
window  this  week  the  freer  use  of  the  possessive  is  felt  as 
a  licence,  because  at  first  sight  we  should  assume  his  man 
to  mean  'his  servant/  and  his  window  to  mean  'his  own 
window/  although  the  context  suffices  to  suggest  the  freer 
meaning.  In  the  first  sentence  his  adversary  would  be  quite 
normal,  because  the  word  adversary  does  not  suggest  in  any 
way  the  idea  of  possession. 

2109.  In  some  cases  possessives  are  little  more  than 
reference-words,  and  we  are  often  at  liberty  to  use  either 
a  possessive  or  the  definite  article  (cp.  the  heard^  §  2020). 
Thus  we  may  speak  of  the  subject  of  a  narrative  or  dis- 
cussion as  our  hero  as  well  as  the  hero,  or,  more  familiarly, 
as  our  young  friend. 

2110.  The  possessive >'^»r  [not  thy]  is  also  used  like  our 
in  the  preceding  examples.  But  while  our  suggests  the  idea 
of  taking  under  one's  protection  or  patronage— which  may 
degenerate  into  good-natured  contempt — your  generally 
suggests  antagonism  to  what  is  brought  forward  by  the 
person  implied  by  the  you,  this  antagonism  often  taking 
the  form  of  dislike  or  contempt,  sometimes  simply  of  in- 
difference, implying  'say  what  you  will,'  'these  examples 
will  do  as  well  as  any  others ' ;  a  smile — not  one  of  your  un- 
meaning wooden  grins — but  a  real  .  .  smile  \  I  would  teach 
these  nineteen  the  special  rules^  as  your  punto,  your  reverso, 
your  .  .  (Ben  Jonson).  Hence  it  is  often  used  to  show  that 
the  speaker  is  talking  in  a  humorous  or  sportive  vein. 

2111.  The  use  of  my  Lord,  my  Lady  in  the  vocative 
relation  has  led  to  these  combinations  becoming  fixed  that 
they  are  freely  used  in  the  third  person  without  any 
suggestion  of  address,  as  in  my  Lord  and  my  Lady  quarrelled, 
and  abused  each  other ^  where   my  Lord  =^  Lord  A,     This 


§aii6.]     PRONOUNS :   POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS.  75 

usage  seems  to  have  arisen  from  the  desire  to  avoid  con- 
fusion with  Lord  {God)  /,  /he  Lord, 

POSSESSIVES   WITH    GENERAL    ADJECTIVES. 

2112.  Possessives  can  take  before  them  the  same  general 
adjectives  of  quantity  which  can  also  precede  the  articles, 
such  as  all,  both,  half:  all  my  iimey  both  his  eyes,  half  his  time 
[but  also  half  of  his  lime]. 

2113.  The  other  general  adjectives  follow  the  possessives : 
his  whole  time,  my  three  friends,  fher  every  word  a  wasp. 

2114.  In  most  cases  possessives  when  used  assumptively 
cannot  take  before  them  a  general  adjective  without  the 
change  of  construction  seen  in  a  friend  of  his,  he  is  no  friend 
of  mine,  three  friends  of  mine.  In  all  these  instances  the 
construction  has  a  partitive  meaning:  a  friend  of  his  — ^2^ 
friend  from  among  his  friends.'  But  there  is  a  difference 
between  the  purely  partitive  three  of  my  friends  and  the 
vaguer  three  friends  of  mine,  which  does  not — as  the  pre- 
ceding example  does — necessarily  imply  that  the  speaker 
has  more  than  three  friends;  although,  on  the  other  hand, 
it  does  not  definitely  limit  them  to  three,  as  in  my  three 

friends,  where  three  is  equivalent  to  a  descriptive  adjective. 

2115.  In  the  earlier  Modern  English  possessives  may  be 
preceded  by  the  demonstratives  this  and  that\  but  in  the 
present  English  such  constructions  as'  this  our  friendship, 
these  my  children  occur  only  in  the  higher  literary  style,  the 
colloquial  language  using  the  periphrastic  constructions — 
this  friendship  of  ours — by  the  analogy  of  the  partitive 
constructions  described  above. 

Emphatic  Possessives. 

2116.  The  emphatic  possessives  are — like  the  unemphatic 
ones — used  both  assumptively  {Jiis  own  house)  and  absolutely: 
his  house  is  his  own. 

They  are  also  used  as  nouns  :  he  knows  how  to  hold  his  own. 


76  SYNTAX.  [§aii7. 

2117.  They  take  the  prepositional  construction  in  all 
cases  in  which  the  unemphatic  possessives  do,  as  in  he  gave 
it  to  a  friend  of  his  own  \  he  has  no  house  of  his  own  compared 
with  all  his  own  houses  are  .  . 

2118.  As  own  is  never  used  except  in  combination  with 
possessives  (or  genitives)  we  cannot  say  in  English  *he  has 
own  money  = '  he  has  private  means '  in  an  indefinite  sense, 
as  we  could  in  German.  Hence,  as  the  prepositional 
possessive  is  in  itself  indefinite  (2114),  we  always  use  it  in 
such  cases' as  he  has  money  of  his  own  compared  with  the 
definite  he  has  the  control  of  his  own  money. 

Interrogative  Fronouns. 

2119.  In  Old-English  the  neuter  hwcet  is  always  used 
(conjunctively  as  well  as  relatively)  instead  of  hwd  when  there 
is  an  accompanying  pronoun  to  show  that  persons  are 
meant:  hwcBt  sind  ge?  'who  are  ye?'  |  he  nyste  hwa;t  hie 
wdron  '  he  did  not  know  who  they  were,'  that  is,  '  he  did  not 
know  what  their  nationality  was.'  In  Modern  Enghsh  we 
always  use  who  of  persons  as  an  identifying  pronoun,  restrict- 
ing what  to  the  descriptive  meaning :  what  is  man  ?  \  what  is 
he — is  he  a  lawyer  ?  compared  with  who  is  he  ?  he  is  the  new 
curate. 

2120.  which  has  a  selective  meaning :  it  assumes  a  group, 
and  asks  for  an  individual  of  that  group,  whence  its  partitive 
construction  with  of  as  in  which  is  it  to  he?  \  which  is  the 
shortest  way?  \  which  of  these  three  will  you  have? 

2121.  The  use  of  what  in  questions  expressing  surprise—^ 
whaf?  and  in  rhetorical  questions — what  right  have  you 
to  interfere? — has  led  to  an  extended  use  of  it  in  Modern 
English  as  an  intensitive  word,  and  in  exclamative  sentences : 
what  {bad)  manners  1  what  a  (ponderfut)  man!  \  what  an  eye 
he  has  ! 

2122.  In  Old-English  hwcet  has  the  indefinite  sense  of 
'something.'     This  survives  only  in  the  phrase  I  will  tell  you 


§ai26.]  PRONOUNS :   RELATIVE  PRONOUNS.  77 

whai,  which  is  often  expanded  into  /  will  tell  you  what  it  is, 
the  shorter  phrase  being  regarded  as  an  elliptical  form  of  the 
longer  one.  This  meaning  survives  partially  in  the  correlative 
adverbial  what  with  .  .  what  with. 

Relative  Pronouns. 

2123.  In  the  spoken  language  relative  pronouns  are 
generally — not  always— omitted  in  clauses  dependent  on 
a  word  in  the  direct-object  relation :  the  man  I  saw  yesterday  \ 
the  book  you  told  me  of.  In  writing  we  generally  put  in  a 
relative  pronoun :  the  man  whom  (or  that)  I  saw  \  the  book  of 
which  you  told  me, 

2124.  The  omission  of  a  relative  in  the  subject-relation  is 
quite  exceptional  in  the  present  spoken  English,  but  was  fre- 
quent in  the  earlier  Modern  EngHsh.  In  who  is  that  just 
rang  ?  it  is  omitted  in  order  to  avoid  the  repetition  involved 
in  who  is  that  who  .  .  ,  who  is  that  that ,  .  In  it  is  not  the  fine 
coat  makes  the  fine  gentleman  we  feel  that  the  omission  of  the 
relative  is  the  result  of  confusion  with  the  corresponding 
positive  statement  the  fine  coat  makes  the  fine  gentleman. 

2125.  The  oldest  relative  pronoun  is  that.  It  can  refer 
to  persons  as  well  as  things,  but  its  use  is  limited  in  other 
respects.  Like  who,  it  is  used  only  as  a  noun,  not  as  an 
adjective. 

2126.  It  always  stands  at  the  head  of  its  clause,  and  cannot 
have  a  preposition  before  it.  Thus  in  such  literary  sentences 
as  the  book  of  which  you  told  me  \  the  letter  to  which  you  refer 
the  change  of  which  into  that  would  necessitate  putting  the  pre- 
position at  the  end  of  the  clause  :  the  book  that  you  told  me  of 
This  last  construction  is  sometimes  used  in  writing  as  a  mean 
between  the  stiff  construction  with  which  and  the  purely  col- 
loquial with  omitted  that  {the  book  you  told  me  of).  But  even 
in  colloquial  speech  the  construction  with  preposition  +  J^^^VA 
cannot  always  be  avoided,  as  in  observe  the  dignity  with  which 


78  SYNTAX.  [§  3127. 

he  rises  /,  where  we  could  not  say  the  dignity  he  rises  with^ 
which  would,  indeed,  be  unintelligible. 

2127.  It  is  important  to  observe  that  that  is  always  very 
closely  connected  with  its  antecedent  both  logically  and  for- 
mally, and  is  never  used  when  there  is  anything  like  a  pause 
between  the  relative  clause  and  the  principal  clause.  Hence 
it  is  never  used  as  a  progressive  relative. 

2128.  As  it  is  always  pronounced  with  a  weak  vowel  (tSst), 
it  cannot  take  stress,  and  hence  cannot  be  followed  by  a 
pause.  Thus  we  could  not  substitute  it  for  who  in  he  is 
a  man  who,  if .  . 

2129.  that  was  formerly  used  with  an  antecedent  that,  as 
in  thai  thou  hadst  seen  that  that  this  knight  and  I  have  seen ! 
(Shakespeare).  We  now  use  the  condensed  relative  in  such 
constructions  :  /  wish  you  had  seen  what  we  have  seen. 

2130.  who  is,  of  course,  used  only  as  a  noun.  It  is  used 
mainly  in  reference  to  living  beings,  especially  human  beings. 
It  is  occasionally  used  of  the  higher  animals.  In  Early 
Modern  English  it  is  sometimes  applied  to  things,  but  gene- 
rally with  implied  personification:  a  gentle  flood  who  ,  . 
(Shakespeare). 

2131.  But  the  possessive  whose  is  still  applied  to  lifeless 
things,  though  with  a  certain  hesitation,  and  only  to  avoid 
the  longer  of  which.  In  the  spoken  language  we  avoid  such 
constructions  as  a  tree  whose  shade  .  .  as  much  as  possible. 

2132.  which  diflfers  from  that  and  who  in  being  used  both 
as  an  adjective  as  well  as  a  noun.  As  a  noun  it  now  refers 
only  to  lifeless  things.  In  early  Modern  English  it  was  freely 
applied  to  persons  as  well,  and  this  usage  lasted  into  the  pre- 
ceding century.  As  which  is  the  only  relative  adjective,  it  is 
in  this  function  necessarily  applied  to  living  as  well  as  lifeless 
objects. 

In  early  Modern  English   which  often  takes  the  before  it : 


§2138.]      PRONOUNS:   RELATIVE  PRONOUNS.  79 

the  cities  in  the  which  Lot  dwelt  (Bible)  |  she  hath  received  your 
letter^  for  the  which  she  thanks  you  a  thousand  times  (Shake- 
speare). As  this  usage  is  against  all  analogy,  it  is  probable  that 
it  is  an  imitation  of  the  French  lequel. 

In  some  cases  there  is  a  certain  amount  of  fluctuation  in 
the  use  of  the 'different  relative  pronouns. 

2133.  We  have  seen  that  only  which  can  be  used  as  an 
adjective.  Also  that  only  who  and  which  can  be  used  as 
progressive  noun-relatives. 

2134.  As  adjective  relatives  and  progressive  relatives  are 
not  natural  to  colloquial  speech,  which  hardly  ever  occurs  in 
the  spoken  language  except  when  it  has  a  sentence  for  its 
antecedent  (217),  which,  again,  is  not  a  frequent  construction 
in  the  spoken  language. 

2135.  Hence  the  only  two  relatives  in  general  colloquial 
use  are  that  and  who. 

2136.  The  present  spoken  English  shows  a  reaction  against 
the  earlier  colloquial  tendency  to  favour  that.  The  general 
tendency  now  is  to  substitute  who  for  that  when  persons  are 
referred  to,  that  taking  the  place  of  the  lost  which. 

2137.  This  tendency  in  favour  of  who  is  clearly  seen  in 
many  relative  clauses  which,  although  not  fully  progressive, 
are  more  descriptive  than  defining ;  in  such  sentences  we 
generally  use  who  in  preference  to  that,  as  in  dinner-time  then 
came  again,  to  the  especial  delight  of  the  two  children,  who  felt 
rather  empty  |  he  had  been  well  thrashed  by  a  gentleman  who 
did  not  approve  of  his  trespassing  on  his  grounds,  while  in 
parallel  sentences  dealing  with  things  we  can  always  substi- 
tute that  for  which',  the  brook  ran  into  a  series  of  fishponds, 
which  (or  that^  looked  very  old,  for  their  sides  were  shaggy  with 
reeds,  and .  .  \  the  earth  is  a  big  ball  that  is  always  spinning 
round  like  a  top, 

2138.  In  the  above  examples  the  who  individualizes  and 
singles  out  the  person  it  refers  to.  But  if  the  relative  describes 
the  person  denoted  hy  its  antecedent  only  by  including  him 


8o  SYNTAX,  [§  ai39. 

in  a  class,  then  that  is  obligatory :  Newton  ivas  one  of  the 
greatest  men  thai  ever  lived  |  he  is  a  man  that  will  never  get  on 
in  the  world.  In  the  first  example  the  relative  clause  has  so 
little  descriptive  force  that  it  might  be  omitted  without  sensible 
loss  to  the  meaning  of  the  whole.  With  the  second  example 
compare  is  that  the  man  who  is  getting  on  so  well  at  the  bar  y», 
where  the  relative  is  directly  descriptive,  and  does  not  merely 
include  the  man  in  a  class.  In  such  examples  as  the  follow- 
ing we  may  use  either  that  or  who,  according  as  we  wish  to 
show  that  we  are  thinking  of  the  persons  collectively  or  indi- 
vidually :  when  the  boat  came  near  the  shore,  they  thought  they 
recognized  one  of  the  convicts  that  were  in  her  \  they  give  prizes 
to  the  boys  that  have  the  best  manners. 

2189.  Hence  in  those  cases  in  which  we  can  employ 
either  that  or  who  with  only  a  slight  shade  of  difference  of 
meaning,  the  latter  is  more  polite,  as  emphasizing  the  fact 
that  we  are  speaking  of  living  beings  and  that  we  respect 
their  individuality:  those  {^embers)  who  are  in  favour  of  this 
resolution  will  please  hold  up  their  hands  \  I  cannot  understand 
how  any  one  who  has  once  taken  an  interest  in  education  can 
ever  lose  it. 

2140.  Hence  also  the  combination  he  that  is  now  obsolete 
in  the  spoken  language,  being  preserved  only  in  traditional 
phrases  such  as  he  that  fights  and  runs  away  may  live  to  fight 
another  day.  We  now  employ  some  such  construction  as 
a  man  who  .  . ,  or,  if  absolutely  necessary,  a  man  that. 

2141.  Although  a  relative  in  the  direct- object  relation  is 
generally  omitted,  there  are  cases  where  this  would  lead  to 
obscurity  or  awkwardness ;  in  such  cases  the  spoken  language 
seems  always  to  use  that,  evidently  in  order  to  avoid  the 
'  ungrammatical '  who  =  whom :  Mrs.  Carnahy  was  helped  out 
of  the  trap  ;  .  .  then  the  children  were  lifted  out  by  the  motherl- 
and then  the  nurse,  an  awkward,  plain  girl  that  nobody  helped, 
tumbled  out  by  herself.  Here  the  that  ought  to  imply  that  the 
nurse  as  a  general  rule  was  not  helped  out  by  any  one, 


§ai45.]  VERBS:    NUMBER.  8l 

whereas  the  meaning  is  that  she  was  not  helped  out  by 
certain  definite  individuals  on  a  certain  definite  occasion. 

2142.  In  the  written  language  the  fluctuation  between  the 
relatives  is  of  course  much  greater,  because  of  the  greater 
variety  of  constructions,  and  the  necessity  of  putting  in 
relatives  where  they  are  omitted  in  natural  speech,  so  that 
the  writer  has  no  linguistic  instinct  to  guide  him. 


NUMERALS. 

2143.  Cardinals  are  used  instead  of  ordinals  in  some 
constructions:  in  the  year  1800,  in  1800  |  he  lives  at  (number) 
12,  High  Street. 

2144.  Numerals  are  used  in  a  variety  of  elliptical  con- 
structions, such  as  a  man  0/ thirty  {years  o/age),  a  carriage- 
and-five  (horses\  at  ten  (d clock)  \  the  tenth  {day)  of  May,  the 
fifth  {part)  of .  .  ,  whence  has  developed  the  noun  fifth  in 
four-fifths. 

Although  we  feel  cut  in  two  to  be  elliptical,  the  Old-English 
on  twa  to'd^lan  shows  that  it  cannot  be  a  shortening  of  on 
twegen  dalas,  and  hence  is  historically  not  the  result  of 
ellipse. 


VERBS. 

Number, 

2145.  Concord  requires  that  a  verb  should  agree  in  num- 
ber with  its  subject.  This  principle  is  always  adhered  to 
when  the  subject  is  a  single  word  of  unmistakable  singular 
or  plural  meaning  as  well  as  form ;  but  when  the  meaning  is 
in  conflict  with  the  number,  logical  considerations  generally 
prevail  over  grammatical,  so  that  subject  and  verb  are  in 
different  numbers. 

VOL.  II.  o 


82  SYNTAX,  [§2146. 

2146.  Collective  nouns  (compare  §  1972)  in  the  singular 
are  frequently  joined  to  plural  verbs  whenever  the  statement 
is  meant  to  apply  to  the  separate  individuals,  while  a  singular 
verb  implies  that  the  speaker  is  not  thinking  of  the  individuals, 
but  rather  of  the  whole  collective  body.  Thus  we  can  say 
either  the  public  is  .  .  or  the  public  are  .  .  ,  the  Council  {the 
Board)  is  or  are  of  opinion  that .  .  Both  numbers  may  even 
occur  in  the  same  sentence,  as  in  the  people  is  one^  and  they 
have  {all)  one  language. 

2147.  Conversely,  subjects  in  the  plural  which  suggest 
ideas  of  singularity  may  take  singular  verbs,  as  in  forty  yards 
is  too  much  \  thirty  yards  is  a  good  distance. 

2148.  Special  difficulties  arise  when  the  subject  consists 
not  of  a  single  noun- word,  but  of  a  group  of  words. 

2149.  Thus,  although  two  or  more  nouns  joined  by  and^ 
or  standing  in  a  copulative  relation  without  any  conjunction, 
ought  grammatically  to  have  their  verb  in  the  plural,  there 
are  many  cases  where  the  plural  would  be  logically  im- 
possible, or  at  least  unnatural,  as  with  such  groups  as  a  needle 
and  thready  the  peace  and  good  order  of  society,  where  the 
combination  expresses  one  idea. 

2150.  So  also,  on  the  other  hand,  two  or  more  nouns 
joined  by  or  or  nor  do  not  necessarily  take  a  verb  in  the 
singular  unless  they  stand  in  a  strong  alternative  relation  to 
one  another ;  while  two  words  standing  logically  in  a  strong 
alternative  or  adversative  relation  to  one  another  take  a  sin- 
gular verb  whatever  their  purely  grammatical  relations  may 
be :  nor  heaven  nor  earth  have  been  at  peace  to-night  (Shake- 
speare) =>%^az'^»  and  earth  have  not ,  .\  my  poverty,  and  not  my 
willy  consents  (Shakespeare). 

2151.  When  an  additional  subject  is  tagged  on,  there  is 
a  tendency  to  make  the  number  of  the  verb  depend  ex- 
clusively on  the  preceding  subject- word,  as  in  +  the  earth  is 
the  Lordsy  and  the  fullness  thereof 


§ai570  VERBS:  PERSON,  83 

2162.  Hence  the  distinction  we  instinctively  make  between 
/Ae  captain  was  taken  prisoner  with  three  of  his  men  and  the 
ungrammatical  the  captain  with  three  of  his  men  were  taken 
prisoner. 

2153.  When  a  verb  is  followed  by  more  than  one  subject — 
not  by  tagging,  but  by  regular  grammatical  inversion — it 
often  agrees  in  number  with  the  nearest  one,  especially  in 
earlier  Modern  English:  where  is  Lysander  and  sweet 
Hermia  ?  (Shakespeare). 

2154.  Anomalies  sometimes  arise  through  referring  the 
verb  not  to  its  subject,  but  to  some  word  connected  with  the 
subject,  as  in  the  opinion  of  several  eminent  lawyers  were  in  his 

favour^  which  is  at  the  same  time  a  case  of  attraction  |  thai 
is  one  of  the  most  Valuable  books  that  has  appeared  in  any 
language^  where  the  prominence  of  the  logical  subject  one, 
together  with  the  want  of  any  mark  of  plurality  in  that, 
causes  the  plurality  of  books  to  be  overlooked. 

Person. 

2165.  In  the  older  Arian  languages  the  persons  of  verbs 
were  so  clearly  shown  by  their  inflections  that  a  verb  could 
stand  alone  without  any  subject-word,  either  noun  or  pro- 
noun, and  the  pronouns  were  added  only  when  emphatic. 

2156.  In  Old-English,  where  the  endings  were  less  distinct 
— there  being,  for  instance,  no  distinction  of  persons  in  the 
plural  of  any  verb — the  personal  pronouns  were  regularly 
added  whenever  the  person  of  the  verb  was  not  shown 
grammatically  by  some  other  word,  and  their  omission  is 
exceptional. 

2157.  But  Old-English  still  shows  traces  of  the  older 
usage  in  the  regular  omission  of  the  pronouns  in  explanatory 
supplementary  sentences  closely  connected  with  the  preceding 
sentence  :  J>d  for  he  norpryhte  be  p&m  lande :  let  him  ealne- 
weg  pcBt  weste  land  on  pcet  steorbord  '  then  he  sailed  direct 

G  2 


84  SYNTAX.  [§2158. 

north  along  the  land,  keeping  the  uninhabited  country  on 
the  starboard  all  the  time'  |  hie  hine pa  bismorlide a'cwealdon : 
of-torfodon  mid  bdnum  and  mid  hrtpera  heafdum  '  then  they 
killed  him  ignominiously  by  pelting  him  with  bones  and 
heads  of  oxen.'  In  this  construction  the  verb  always  has 
connective  front-position  (1809). 

2158.  In  the  imperative,  where  the  distinction  is  not 
required,  the  primitive  omission  of  the  pronouns  is  still  kept 
up,  their  addition  being  still  emphatic  (1806). 

2159.  In  careless  speech  the  pronouns  are  often  omitted 
when  the  context  is  clear,  and  in  all  persons :  hg  will  not 
have  any  help  :  {he)  says  he  can  do  it  all  himself  \  where  has 
he  gone  to  ?    (/)  doiit  know,     {you)  don't  know,  don't  you  .^ 

2160.  When  a  verb  refers  to  two  or  more  pronouns  of 
different  persons,  there  is  difficulty  in  determining  what 
ought  to  be  the  person  of  the  verb,  as  in  either  you  or  I  am 
or  are  in  the  wrong.  It  would  seem  most  natural  to  make 
the  verb  agree  with  the  nearest  pronoun.  But  am  wrong 
sounds  unnatural,  because  it  seems  expressly  to  exclude  the 
you.  On  the  other  hand  are  wrong  seems  to  suggest  the 
idea  of  the  third  rather  than  the  second  person  plural.  But 
as  it  does  not  exclude  the  second  person  plural,  it  is  pre- 
ferred to  am.  We  should  not  hesitate  to  employ  i|  in 
a  conjunctive  collocation  such  as_y^«  and  I  are  one.  In  the 
disjunctive  either  he  or  I  is  in  the  wrong  we  prefer  the  third 
person  singular. 

2161.  But  we  avoid  such  difficulties  as  much  as  possible 
by  using  some  verb  which  does  not  distinguish  persons : 
either  you  or  I  must  be  in  the  wrong. 

2162.  Early  Modern  English  has  similar  difficulties  in 
some  relative  clauses.  Thus  the  Prayer  Book  has  thou  art 
the  God  that  doeth  wonders  against  the  Bible's  doest.  In  the 
Present  English  we  use  the  third  person :  are  you  the  man 
that  has  the  key  ? 


1 63.] 


VERBS:    TENSES. 


85 


Tenses. 

2163.    The  following  paradigm  gives  a  general  view  of 
the  tense-distinctions  of  the  Present  English  verb. 


ACTIVE. 

Indicative. 

PASSIVE. 

Present 

I  see 

I  am  seen 

De/.pres, 

I  am  seeing 

I  am  being  seen 

Preterite 

I  saw 

I  was  seen 

Def.pret. 

I  was  seeing 

I  was  being  seen 

Perfect 

I  have  seen 

I  have  been  seen 

Def.perf. 

I  have  been  seeing 

I  have  been  being 
seen 

Pluperfect 

I  had  seen 

I  had  been  seen 

Defplup. 

I  had  been  seeing 

I  had  been  being 
seen 

Future 

I  shall  see 

I  shall  be  seen 

Deffut. 

I  shall  be  seeing 

I  shall  be  being  seen 

Future  preterite 

I  should  see 

I  should  be  seen 

Deffut.  pret. 

I  should  be  seeing 

I  should  be  being 
seen 

Future  perfect 

I  shall  have  seen 

I  shall  have  been  seen 

Deffut.  per f 

I  shall  have  been 

I   shall    have   been 

seeing 

being  seen 

Conditional. 

Present 

I  should  see 

I  should  be  seen 

Defpres. 

I  should  be  seeing 

I  should  be  being 
seen 

Preterite 

I  should  have  seen 

I  should  have  been 
seen 

Def  pret. 

I  should  have  been 

I  should  have  been 

seeing  being  seen 


Imperative. 


Present 


seel 


be  seen  I 


86 

SYNTAX, 

[§  a  16^ 

Supine  {Infinitive). 

Present 

to  see 

to  be  seen 

De/.pres, 

to  be  seeing 

to  be  being  seen 

Perfect 

to  have  seen 

to  have  been  seen 

ne/.perf. 

to  have  been  seeing 
Participle. 

to  have  been  being 
seen 

Present 

seeing 

being  seen 

Preterite 

— 

seen 

Perfect 

having  seen 

having  been  seen 

Defperf 

having  been  seeing 

having  been  being 

seen 


2164.  Some  of  the  longer  forms — especially  in  the  pas- 
sive— seldom  or  never  occur. 


Have-Forms. 

2165.  In  the  periphrastic  tenses  formed  with  have  Xht 
preterite  participle  is  generally  indeclinable  in  Old-English, 
but  in  the  earlier  period  it  is  often  put  in  the  accusative,  as 
in  pa  hi  hie  ofslcegene  hcefde  *  when  he  had  killed  them,'  hie 
hcefdon  hira  cyning  d'worpenne  '  they  had  deposed  their  king,' 
showing  that  it  was  originally  regarded  as  an  adjective  in 
apposition  to  the  noun-word  governed  by  have — '  they  had 
their  king  in  a  state  of  being  deposed.' 

2166.  It  is  evident  that  these  forms  were  at  first  used  only 
with  transitive  verbs.  Accordingly,  in  Old-English  the  corre- 
sponding forms  of  intransitive  verbs  are  generally  formed 
with  be:  he  is  hider  cumen  *he  has  come  here'  \hle  waron 
dfarene  *they  had  departed.'  Here  the  participle  always 
agrees  with  the  noun-word  with  which  it  is  connected.  It 
must,  of  course,  be  taken  in  an  active  sense — '  he  is  in 
a  state  of  having  come.' 

2167.  But  when  the  origin  of  the  have-forms  had  been 


§2171.]  VERBS:    TENSES  (DO),  87 

forgotten,  they  were  gradually  extended  to  intransitive  verbs 
as  well,  especially  when  stress  was  laid  on  the  idea  of  inde- 
pendent action,  as  in  hte  hce/don  gegdn  *  they  (had)  marched.' 
Even  weorpan  *  become  '  takes  have  in  the  special  impersonal 
construction  hu  hint  hce/de  geworden  wip  hie  '  how  he  had 
fared  with  her/ 

2168.  In  Modern  English  the  use  of  have  has  been  ex- 
tended to  all  verbs,  although  we  still  use  be  in  sbme  cases  to 
imply  a  state  or  result  rather  than  an  action :  is  he  gone  ?  [he 
has  gone  on  a  journey]  \  when  he  awoke,  the  hoys  of  the  village 
were  gathered  round  him.  In  such  constructions  we  feel  the 
participles  to  be  equivalent  to  adjectives.  Hence  the  collo- 
quial construction  /  am  done  —  I  have  done  '  I  have  finished,' 
on  the  analogy  of  /  am  ready. 

Do-FoRMS. 

2169.  The  simple  forms  of  the  finite  verb — (indefinite) 
present,  preterite,  and  imperative — have  special  emphatic 
and  interrogative  forms  compounded  with  do: — 

Unemphatic,        Emphatic.  Interrogative. 

Present  I  see  I  ;do  see  -do  I  see 

Preterite  I  saw  I  ;did  see  -did  I  see 

Imperative        see  1  ;do  see !  — 

2170.  The  remaining  emphatic  forms  are  made  simply  by 
putting  an  emphatic  stress  on  the  auxiliary  (of  course  in  its 
strong  form);  the  interrogative  forms  by  transposing  the 
pronoun  and  auxiliary. 

2171.  As  all  the  interrogative  forms  can  also  be  made 
emphatic,  we  have  in  all  eight  forms.  It  will  be  enough  to 
give  those  of  the  indefinite  present  and  future  as  examples: — 

Affirmative  I  see  I  shall  see 

Affirm,  emphatic  I  ;do  see  I  ;shall  see 

Negative  I  don't  see  I  shan't  see 

Neg.  emph.  I  jdon't  see  I  ;shan't  see 


88  SYNTAX.  [§2173. 

Affirm,  interrogative  do  I  see  shall  I  see 

Affirm,  interr.  emph.  ;do  I  see  ;shall  I  see 

Negative  interr.  don't  I  see  shan't  I  see 

Neg.  interr.  emph.  ;don*t  I  see  ;shan't  I  see 

2172.  The  first  beginnings  of  the  auxiliary  use  of  do  can 
be  traced  back  to  Old-English.  In  Old-English  the  use 
of  do  as  a  substitute  for  a  preceding  verb  is  fully  developed, 
as  in  Crist  weox  swd-swd  dpre  cild  dop  '  Christ  grew  as  other 
children  do.'  Allied  to  this  is  its  peculiar  anticipative  use 
in  such  sentences  as  se  mona  dip  cegper^  ge  wiext  ge  wanap 
'the  moon  does  both:  both  waxes  and  wanes/  where  the 
omission  of  the  personal  pronoun  is  quite  regular,  the  second 
clause  being  complementary  or  explanatory  (2157).  From 
this  half-auxiliary  use  was  developed  the  full  auxiliary  use 
with  the  second  verb  in  the  infinitive,  which  is  however  still 
very  rare  in  Old-English:  swd  dop  nu pdpeostru  wip'standan  . . 
'so  now  does  darkness  resist  .  .'  This  change  of  con- 
struction was  probably  due  to  the  analogy  of  the  construction 
of  the  other  auxiliaries  with  the  infinitive. 

2178.  A  similar  anticipative  use  of  do  in  imperative 
sentences  is  found  in  Transition  and  Early  Middle  English : 
do^  gd  and  ne  synga  pU  nafre  md  '  go  and  sin  no  more '  |  do, 
seie  hwuil  *  say  why ! '  It  is  very  doubtful  whether  this  has 
any  connexion  with  the  Modern  emphatic  imperative. 

2174.  The  other  anticipative  construction  soon  died  out 
in  Middle  English  without  leaving  any  traces  in  Modern 
English,  while  the  f/d?  +  infinitive  construction  extended  more 
and  more,  especially  towards  the  end  of  the  Middle  English 
period.  By  the  beginning  of  the  Modern  period  it  had 
become  an  integral  part  of  the  language. 

2175.  But  even  in  the  Modern  period  the  do-ioim^  had 
not  at  first  any  distinctive  meaning,  and  were  used  promis- 
cuously with  the  simple  forms,  according  as  caprice,  con- 
venience, and  clearness  of  construction,  or  euphony  suggested. 


§  2i8o.]  VERBS  :    TENSES  (DO).  89 

2176.  The  auxiliary  do  was  from  the  beginning  capable 
of  taking  strong  stress  when  emphatic,  just  like  any  other 
auxiliary.  Hence  Early  Modern  EngHsh  was  able  to  dis- 
tinguish four  forms  :  the  simple  (I see),  which  might  be  either 
emphatic  or  unemphatic,  the  periphrastic  unemphatic  (/  -do 
see),  and  the  same  emphatic  (/  jdo  see). 

2177.  By  the  middle  of  the  sixteenth  century  the  natural 
tendency  to  regard  the  longer  (periphrastic)  forms  as  essen- 
tially more  emphatic  than  the  shorter  (simple)  forms  had 
begun  to  prepare  the  way  for  the  disuse  of  the  un- 
emphatic periphrastic  forms,  so  that  /  ;do  see  came  to 
be  regarded  as  the  direct  emphatic  form  of  the  simple 
unemphatic  I  see. 

2178.  In  the  Present  English  the  emphatic  forms  have 
extra  stress  on  the  auxiliary,  to  which  that  of  the  nucleus  is 
subordinated,  while  in  the  unemphatic  negative  forms  the 
auxiliary  and  the  nucleus  have — or  may  have — equal  stress : 
ti  'doestit  "matter!  it  jdoes  matter/  But  of  course  the 
negative  forms  may  be  emphatic  also :  he  ought  not  to  have 
told  him  of  it.    he  ;didnt  tell  him  1 

2179.  As  already  remarked  (1898),  the  emphasis  of  these 
emphatic  forms  is  always  generalizing ;  that  is,  such  a  form 
as  /  do  see  does  not  emphasize  anything  in  the  meaning  of 
see  itself,  but  implies  some  general  antithesis  such  as  that 
between  assertion  and  denial,  the  real  and  the  unreal,  present 
and  past  time,  so  that  I  do  see  implies  *I  see  as  a  fact,*  *I  see 
nowl  etc. 

2180.  If  antithesis  is  the  result  of  contrasting  the  special 
meaning  of  a  full  verb  with  that  of  some  other  word,  then  the 
emphatic  stress  necessarily  falls  on  the  nucleus  in  the  peri- 
phrastic forms,  as  did  he  ;ride?  I  thought  he  walked.  In 
Early  Modern  English  this  is  also  possible  with  afl&rmative 
</(?-forms,  as  in  for  otherwise  they  -do  pervert  the  faculties  of 
the  mind,  and  not  prepare  them.  This  usage  lasted  longest 
with  verbs  of  requesting — I  do  entreat  you — and  asserting — 


90  SYNTAX.  [§  fli8i. 

/  do  assure  you — but  is  now  almost  extinct  in  the  spoken 
language. 

2181.  The  use  of  the  ^(C?-periphrasis  in  questions  was  no 
doubt  prompted  by  the  desire  to  avoid  the  inconvenience  of 
the  old  verb-inversion,  especially  the  detaching  of  the  verb 
from  its  object  {see  you  it?)  and  the  placing  of  the  subject 
in  what  ought  to  be  the  object-position  (cakh  dogs  mice?), 
while  the  periphrastic  forms  do  you  see  it?  |  do  dogs  catch 
mice  ?  show  practically  no  divergence  from  the  order  in  the 
corresponding  affirmative  sentences. 

2182.  That  this  was  the  real  reason  for  the  general 
adoption  of  the  periphrastic  forms  in  questions  is  shown  by 
the  fact  that  it  is  never  used  in  those  interrogative  sentences 
which  have  the  same  order  as  affirmative  sentences,  that  is, 
in  special  interrogative  sentences  beginning  with  an  inter- 
rogative pronoun  in  the  nominative,  as  in  who  broke  that 
window  ?  I  what  brought  you  here  /,  or  with  an  interrogative 
word  or  word-group  qualifying  the  subject,  as  in  which  boy 
broke  the  window?  \  how  many  people  came? 

2188.  The  occasional  colloquial  use  of  the  simple  inter- 
rogative form  in  such  phrases  as  what  say  you  ?  \  what  think 
you?  is  partly  archaic,  partly  due  to  the  influence  of  the 
dialects. 

2184.  As  might  be  expected,  the  do4orms  are  equally 
obligatory  in  other  cases  of  verb-inversion  (1814),  most  of 
which,  however,  do  not  occur  in  the  spoken  language :  did 
Nature  act  with  full  consciousness,  these  imperfect  formations 
were  inexplicable  \  no  sooner  did  Boxer  hear  the  gun  than  he 
jumped  up  with  a  howl  \  so  high  did  political  animosities  run 

that  .  . 

2185.  For  the  reasons  given  in  §  2181  inverted  transitive 
verbs  always  take  the  periphrastic  form,  even  in  constructions 
in  which  transitive  verbs  keep  the  simple  form,  either  always, 
as  in  the  colloquial  here  comes  .  . ,  down  fell .  . ,  now  comes  .  . , 
or  occasionally,  as  in  the  more  literary  thus  stood  matters  \ 


§  ai9i.]  VERBS :    TENSES  (DO).  9I 

wt/h  ihe  new  life  came  new  purpose,  with  which  compare  then 
did  I  commit  myself  to  the  one  physician  of  the  soul  \  thus  did 
the  editor  see  himself  All  these  last  constructions  are  purely 
literary. 

But  transitive  verbs  are  inverted  in  parenthetic  sentences 
such  as  says  he  because  there  is  no  subject. 

2186.  The  use  of  do  in  the  negative  forms  of  the  verb 
does  not,  as  in  the  interrogative  forms,  make  the  expression 
clearer  or  more  convenient.  It  is  therefore  probably  a 
development  of  the  emphatic  use,  all  negative  constructions 
being  essentially  emphatic,  because  the  negation  reverses  the 
meaning.  The  analogy  of  the  negative  constructions  of 
the  other  auxiliaries  must  also  have  helped  to  bring  them 
into  general  use  and  fix  their  form. 

2187.  But  many  verbs  in  very  frequent  use  in  negative 
constructions,  such  as  know,  doubt,  care,  still  kept  the  simple 
negative  form  long  after  it  had  been  elsewhere  lost,  and  we 
still  keep  it  in  stereotyped  adverbial  or  parenthetic  phrases 
such  as  /  know  not  how,  I  doubt  not,  if  I  mistake  not. 

In  such  phrases  as  /  hope  'noty  I  think  'not  the  not  does 
not  negative  the  verb. 

2188.  As  a  general  rule,  do  is,  like  other  auxiliaries,  used 
only  with  verbs  of  full  meaning.  It  would,  indeed,  be  im- 
possible to  introduce  it  into  such  combinations  as  can  he 
come?t  because  can  has  not  an  infinitive. 

2189.  be  and  have  do  not  take  do  in  interrogative  and 
negative  forms  even  when  not  used  as  auxiliaries :  is  he 
ready  ?  \  has  he  any  money  ?  But  they  take  it  in  the  negative 
imperative,  as  in  do  not  be  afraid  I  =^  i\it  literary  be  not  afraid! 

2190.  But  as  have  is  a  transitive  verb  (2181),  there  is  a 
greater  tendency  to  use  the  periphrastic  forms  with  it  than 
with  be.     Thus  we  can  say  either  what  sort  of  a  passage  did 

you  have  ?  or  what  sort  of  a  passage  had  you  ? 

2191.  But   in   British-English   we  avoid  the  American- 


92  SYNTAX.  [§ai92. 

English  periphrasis  in  he  does  not  have  to  work  by  the  use  of 
the  construction  he  has  not  got  to  work,  although  we  feel 
instinctively  that  the  strong  meaning  of  the  have  in  this 
case  justifies  the  American  construction. 

2192.  The  negative  form  of  let  us  go  /  is  do  not  let  us  go  I 
with  an  anomalous  heaping  of  auxiliaries.  The  literary  form 
is,  of  course,  let  us  not  got  \  let  us  not  be  selfish  J 

2193.  do,  like  the  other  auxiliaries,  is  used  absolutely. 
In  some  cases  the  absolute  corresponds  with  the  full  conjoint 
use,  as  m  you  said  so  yourself  I  did  I?  \  did  you  tell  him  ? 
no,  I  did  not  compared  with  did  I  say  so  ?  \  I  did  not  tell 
him. 

2194.  But  the  imperative  and  affirmative  absolute  do  does 
not  show  anything  of  the  emphatic  meaning  of  the  corre- 
sponding full  forms ;  thus  shall  I  ask  him  ?  dol  \  did  you  tell 
him?  yes,  I  did  correspond  in  meaning  to  the  simple  ask 
him  I  I  I  told  him. 

2195.  These  absolute  forms  are,  in  fact,  remains  of  the 
earlier  unemphatic  affirmative  d0'ioivcis>,  which  have  been  pre- 
served by  the  habit  of  repeating  the  auxiliary  of  the  preceding 
sentence,  the  sequence  did  you  tell  him?  yes,  I  did  being 
mainly  kept  up  by  the  analogy  of  such  sequences  as  will  you 
tell  him  ?  yes,  I  will. 

Will  and  Shall. 

2196.  In  the  future  (present  and  preterite)  the  first  person 
is  formed  with  shall,  the  others  with  will : — 

Singular  i  /  shall  see  I  should  see 

2  you  will  see  you  would  see 

3  he  will  see  he  would  see 
Plural       I           we  shall  see  we  should  see 

2  you  will  see  you  would  see 

3  they  will  see  they  would  see 

Examples :  /  suppose  you  will  not  wait  later  than  six.    no. 


§  aaoi.]  VERBS :    WILL  AND  SHALL,  93 

I  certainly  shall  not  \  we  were  afraid  we  should  be  late  \  I  knew 
how  it  would  turn  out. 

2197.  The  same  rules  apply  also — but  with  important 
exceptions — to  the  conditional:  /  should  like  a  glass  of 
water,     would  not  you  rather  have  a  cup  of  tea  ? 

2198.  As  regards  the  origin  of  these  forms,  it  is  to  be 
observed  that  in  Old-English  the  future  is  generally  expressed 
by  the  present,  as  in  the  other  Old  Germanic  languages.  But 
the  auxiliaries  will  and  shall  are  used  to  express  not  only 
futurity  combined  with  the  ideas  of  wish  and  compulsion  re- 
spectively, but  also,  in  some  instances,  pure  futurity :  id  wdt 
pcEt  pis  folc  miclum  hlissian  wile  mines  deapes  *  I  know  that 
this  nation  will  rejoice  greatly  at  my  death  *  |  hie  wendon  pcet 
hie  sdolden  mare  onfon  '  they  expected  to  receive  more.* 

In  Old-English  the  combination  of  the  preterites  would 
and  should  with  infinitives  is  frequently  used  like  the  modern 
conditional  as  substitutes  for  the  preterite  subjunctive. 

2199.  In  Middle  English  shall  and  will+  infinitive  are  used 
as  pure  futures,  shall  being  at  first  much  more  frequent  than 
will,  will  afterwards  came  into  more  general  use,  till  at 
last  in  many  dialects— such  as  the  Scotch — it  has  completely 
banished  shall. 

2200.  In  Southern  English,  on  the  other  hand,  the  origi- 
nally unmeaning  fluctuation  between  will  and  shall  has 
gradually  developed  into  a  fixed  system  of  complicated  rules, 
which  speakers  of  the  other  dialects  have  great  diflficulty  in 
mastering. 

2201.  The  present  use  of  will  and  shall  seems  to  be  the 
result  of  the  desire  to  keep  the  original  meanings  of  these 
verbs  as  much  as  possible  in  the  background.  It  is  evident 
that  in  the  first  person  '  I  must  do  it  to-morrow '  suggests  the 
idea  of  futurity  less  ambiguously  and  more  abstractly  than 
*  I  wish  .  .  ,*  because  a  mere  expression  of  wish  on  the  part 
of  a  speaker  does  not  necessarily  imply  any  expectation  of 
its  fulfilment;   while   his   own   statement   of  obligation   or 


94  SYNTAX,  [§2309. 

compulsion  involves  his  belief  that  it  will  be  carried  out. 
In  the  other  persons  everything  is  reversed.  As  we  know  the 
wishes  of  others  only  by  uncertain  inference,  we  do  not  gene- 
rally say  *  you  wish  .  /  or  *  he  wishes  .  .  /  but  prefer  to  put  the 
statement  in  a  less  direct  form  :  '  I  suppose  you  intend  to  .  .* 
Hence  the  bare  unqualified  statement  j'<?«  will  go  hardly  sug- 
gests the  idea  of  volition  at  all,  and  so  is  excellently  adapted 
to  express  pure  futurity. 

2202.  We  will  now  consider  the  exceptions  to  these  general 
rules : — 

{a)  Unemphatic  tutll  and  shall  can  be  used  in  all  persons 
to  express  the  idea  of  futurity  combined  with  those  of  wish  or 
necessity  respectively  :  I  will  come  as  soon  as  lean  \you  shall 
see  what  I  am  going  to  do  /  The  emphatic  /  ;will  do  it 
expresses  obstinacy,  the  emphatic  /  ;shall  do  it  expresses 
determination,  as  if  the  speaker  meant  to  imply  that  his  will 
was  so  strong  as  to  become  a  purely  objective  force.  The 
two  may  be  combined :  /  ;shall  and  ;will  do  it.  what  ;shall 
I  do  I  expresses  helplessness  or  perplexity. 

{b)  Such  combinations  as  you  and  /,  we  two^  we  three,  we 
all  take  will  instead  of  shall:  we  shall  get  there  first,  but  1 
expect  you  and  I  will  get  there  first  \  we  two  will  he  able  to 
manage  it  quite  well  \  I  shall  dream  about  those  dogs  to-night, 
I  am  sure  I  shall,  so  shall  I.  so  we  all  will.  If  we  put  the 
all  of  the  last  example  after  the  verb,  the  s?iall  must  be 
restored  :  so  shall  we  all.  The  explanation  of  this  anomaly 
is  that  you  and  the  other  words  added  to  the  we  divert  the 
attention  from  the  first  person  and  make  the  idea  of  the 
second  person  prominent  enough  to  suggest  the  more  frequent 
will. 

(r)  In  direct  questions  shall  is  used  instead  of  will  in  the 
second  person,  as  in  shall  you  be  there  ?  compared  with  you 
will  be  there,  I  suppose  ?  It  is  evident  that  our  ignorance  of 
the  will  of  others  (2201)  makes  it  perfectly  natural  for  us  to 
ask  questions  about  it,  so  that  will  you  6e  there  fo-nighi?  is 


§  aaofl.]  VERBS :    WILL  AND  SHALL.  95 

easily  taken  in  its  literal  sense  *  do  you  intend  .  .  ?/  and  hence 
shall  is  substituted.  Such  questions  must  be  direct:  there 
would  be  no  motive  in  asking  questions  of  B  about  C's  will ; 
hence  the  substitution  of  shall  would  be  quite  out  of  place  in 
the  third  person  {will  he  be  there  to-night  ?).  In  enclitic 
questions — which,  it  must  be  remembered,  are  questions  in 
form  only,  not  in  meaning — a  preceding  would  is  always 
repeated,  or,  in  other  words,  the  enclitic  auxiliary  is  attracted 
by  the  preceding  dependent  auxiliary :  you  will  do  it  yourself^ 
will  you  ?  I  you  would  think  sOj  wouldn't  you  ? 

(d)  In  dependent  sentences  of  doubt  shall  is  used  in  all 
persons,  as  in  ty  he  should  come  while  I  am  out^  tell  him  to 
wait  compared  with  /  wish  he  would  come,  because  the  idea 
of  doubt  neutralizes  that  of  compulsion.  In  the  spoken  lan- 
guage this  usage  is  preserved  only  in  the  conditional  form, 
but  in  the  literary  language  it  occurs  in  the  future,  where  the 
spoken  language  always  has  the  present:  if  he  shall  call 
while  I  am  out^  ask  him  to  wait-=iht  colloquial  if  he  calls  .  .  | 
whoever  shall  compare  the  country  round  Rome  with  the  country 
round  Edinburgh,  will  be  able  to  form  some  judgement  as  to  the 
tendency  of  Papal  dominion^  where  whoever  shall  compare  .  .= 
'  if  any  one  compares . .'  Note  in  this  last  example  the 
contrast  between  the  shall  of  the  sub-clause  and  the  normal 
will  of  the  principal  clause. 

{e)  In  such  a  sentence  as  he  says  he  hopes  I  will  be  there 
compared  with  /  told  him  I  should  be  there  the  person  of 
*  I '  is  regarded  from  the  point  of  view  of  *  he,'  as  if  the  sen- 
tence were  in  the  form  he  said  '  I  hope  you  (or  hi)  will  be 
there!  So  also  in  {he  said)  he  was  afraid  we  would  not  {be 
able  to)  come.  In  both  of  these  instances  shall  {should)  is 
admissible,  and  would  probably  be  substituted  by  many  on 
second  thoughts,  but  the  construction  with  will  is  the 
genuinely  colloquial  one. 

(/)  In  {he  says)  he  wishes  we  would  not  keep  the  door  open 
compared  mihyou  seemed  very  anxious  that  we  should  go  the 


96  SYNTAX,  [§  2203. 

would  is  obligatory  because  the  will  here  denotes  repetition 
or  habit,  as  in  he  will — would — sit  for  hours  doing  nothing. 
This  will  is  hardly  ever  used  in  the  first  person,  but  if  so 
used  {he  says  I  will  sit  for  hours  doing  nothing)^  it  would 
necessarily  be  kept  unchanged,  for  /  shall  would  suggest  the 
idea  of  compulsion  or  futurity  so  strongly  as  to  obscure 
entirely  that  of  habit. 

Definite  Tenses. 

2203.  The  periphrastic  forms  corresponding  to  the  Modern 
English  is  writing,  was  writing  are  in  frequent  use  in  Old- 
English,  but  are  only  vaguely  differentiated  from  the  simple 
forms. 

2204.  They  were  no  doubt  originally  formed  on  the 
analogy  of  the  combination  of  the  verb  *  be '  with  adjectives, 
so  that  such  a  paraphrase  as  hie  waron  blissiende  *  they  were 
rejoicing '  was  felt  to  be  intermediate  between  hie  hlissodon 
'  they  rejoiced '  and  hie  waron  blipe  '  they  were  glad.' 

^/  2205.  The  most  fundamental  distinction  between  the 
simple  and  periphrastic  forms  in  Old-English  appears  to  be 
that  the  latter  are  associated  with  the  idea  of  incompletion, 
as  in  pa-pa  he  sprecende  wees  '  while  he  was  speaking '  com- 
pared with  pd-pd  he  sprcBc,  which  may  have  the  meaning  '  was 
speaking,'  but  may  also  have  that  of '  spoke,'  or  even  '  had 
spoken.' 

2206.  The  natural  result  of  this  is  that  the  periphrastic 
forms  occur  very  often  in  constructions  which  involve  the 
idea  of  continuity  or  progression.  But  that  this  idea  is  only 
a  secondary  one  is  shown  by  those  instances  in  which  the 
context  excludes  the  idea  of  duration,  as  when  the  periphrase 
is  accompanied  by  the  adverb  s5na  '  immediately,'  as  in  pa 
3ona  on  anginne  pees  gefeohtes  wees  se  munt  Garganus  hifigende 
mid  orm&tre  cwacunge. 

2207.  In  this  example,  as  in  many  others,  the  context 
suggests — or  at  least  admits — an  inchoative  meaning :  *  then 


§  3214.]  VERBS  :   DEFINITE    TENSES.  97 

immediately  at  the  beginning  of  the  battle  Mount  Garganus 
began  to  tremble  with  excessive  quaking.' 

2208.  The  analogy  of  the  adjective  construction  (2204) 
would  make  us  expect  to  find  the  periphrastic  forms  used 
mainly  to  express  rest,  and  passive  rather  than  active  phe- 
nomena. But,  on  the  contrary,  they  are  especially  favoured 
by  verbs  of  motion   and  fighting — wcbs   winnende,   w&ron 

feohtende — either  with  or  without  the  idea  of  continuity. 

2209.  Here  the  periphrastic  forms  seem  to  be  used  mainly 
to  make  the  narrative  more  vivid  and  picturesque,  so  that 
they  have  come  to  have  what  we  may  call  a  *  descriptive ' 
force. 

2210.  In  many  cases  they  appear  to  have  a  purely  stylistic 
function,  being  introduced  merely  to  round  off  a  period,  and 
to  avoid  abruptness. 

2211.  In  Modern — as  in  Old — English  the  definite  tenses 
always  imply  incompletion ;  thus  he  is  writing  a  letter  implies 
that  the  letter  is  not  finished.  This  is  still  more  marked  in 
the  perfect,  as  in  what  have  you  been  doing  all  day?  compared 
with  what  have  you  done  to-day  /,  which  really  means  *  what 
have  you  completed  to-day  ? ' 

2212.  They  also  always  imply  a  certain  duration:  they 
are  no  longer  used  as  point  or  inchoative  tenses,  as  they 
sometimes  are  in  Old-English. 

2213.  But  the  expression  of  duration  is  not  their  primary 
function  in  Modern  any  more  than  in  Old  English.  Nor  can 
they  be  used  to  express  unlimited  duration  or  repetition : 
this  is  expressed  by  the  indefinite  tenses,  as  in  the  moon  shines 
at  night  \  he  goes  to  Germany  once  a  year. 

2214.  The  characteristic  of  these  tenses  is  that  they  use 
duration  to  define  the  time  of  a  point-tense,  as  in  when  he 
came,  I  was  writing  a  letter.  Here  the  action  of  writing  is 
supposed  to  be  going  on  before  the  point  of  time  indicated 
by  came,  and  to  continue  after  it,  the  amount  of  the  further 

VOL.  II.  H 


98  SYNTAX,  [§  2215. 

duration  of  the  action  backwards   and  forwards  being  in- 
different. 

2215.  A  definite  tense  therefore  often  makes  us  expect 
a  clause  containing  a  verb  in  the  corresponding  indefinite 
tense  to  indicate  the  point  of  time  which  the  definite  tense 
serves  to  define,  as  in  /  shall  be  writing  when  he  comes 
[=  when  he  shall  come],  unless  the  clause  precedes,  as  in 
when  he  came,  I  was  writing. 

2216.  But  in  the  present  the  definite  tense  does  not  require 
or  admit  of  any  accompanying  point-tense,  for  the  definite 
present  is,  in  the  nature  of  things,  self-defining :  lam  writing 
a  letter  means  '  I  am  writing  a  letter  at  the  present  moment 
(of  your  coming).'  So  also  with  the  definite  perfect :  /  have 
been  writing  a  letter. 

2217.  Hence  we  may  say  that  the  definite  present  and 
perfect  are  absolute  tenses,  while  the  definite  preterite  and 
future  are  relative  tenses,  because  they  make  us  expect 
another  clause.  This  clause  may  of  course  take  the  form  of 
an  independent  sentence,  if  the  connexion  is  clear :  we  were 
expecting  you  yesterday  ;  why  didntyou  come  ?  Or  the  point- 
tense  may  be  inferred  from  the  context — sometimes  only  in 
a  very  vague  way,  as  in  /  was  coughing  all  night  long,  which 
is  almost  as  absolute  as  /  coughed  all  night  long.  Here  it 
will  be  observed  that  /  was  coughing  differs  from  /  coughed 
mainly  in  emphasizing  the  idea  of  duration. 

2218.  There  are  some  verbs  which  occur  only  in  the 
indefinite  tenses.  This  is  especially  the  case  with  verbs 
which  express  feelings,  physical  and  mental  perceptions  etc., 
such  2i.s/eel,  like,  think  :  I /eel  ill  \  he  likes  being  here  \  I  think 
so.  But  as  soon  as  the  element  of  volition  or  action  becomes 
prominent,  the  definite  tenses  re-assert  their  rights :  compare 
it  hurts  with  he  is  hurting  him ;  he  doesn't  see  it  with  he  is 
seeing  the  sights ;  /  hear  a  noise  with  /  am  hearing  lectures. 
This  seems  to  be  a  tradition  of  the  Old-English  descriptive 
use  of  these  tenses  (2209). 


§2222.]  VERBS:   DEFINITE   TENSES.  99 

2219.  The  tense  defined  by  a  definite  tense  may  itself  be 
in  the  definite  form :  all  the  while  I  was  writing  there  was 
some  noise  or  other  going  on :  the  children  were  having  their 
music-lessons,  and  the  baby  was  crying  next  door.  Here  the 
definite  tenses  imply  that  the  writing  and  the  noises  were  all 
simultaneous. 

2220.  But  when  the  connexion  between  the  two  sentences 
as  regards  time  is  not  specially  intimate  or  important,  we 
prefer  to  put  only  one  verb  in  the  definite  form,  as  in  she 
stood  in  an  impatient  silence  while  she  was  thus  being  talked 
over^  where  she  was  standing,  although  strictly  correct,  would 
lay  too  much  stress  on  the  logically  subordinate  idea  of 
*  standing.'  So  also  in  as  he  walked  home,  his  heart  danced 
within  him  there  is  no  special  connexion  of  cause  and  effect 
between  the  two  clauses. 

2221.  When  such  words  as  always,  constantly  are  added 
to  a  definite  tense,  it  necessarily  loses  its  definiteness  of 
meaning  as  regards  distinctions  of  time :  she  is  a  good  woman  : 
she  is  always  going  to  church  ;  she  is  ahvays  doing  things  for 
poor  people.  So  also  in  the  preterite  and  future  :  your  mother 
was  a  good  woman :  she  was  always  going  .  .  |  she  will  grow 
up  to  be  a  good  ivoman :  she  will  always  be  going  .  .  The  main 
use  of  the  definite  form  in  such  collocations  is  to  make  the 
statement  absolute ;  thus  he  is  always  complaining  \  he  was 
grumbling  all  the  time  we  were  there  can  stand  by  themselves, 
while  the  corresponding  indefinite  forms  make  us  expect 
something  to  define  the  time  or  show  that  repetition  is 
implied :   he  always  grumbles  when  he  is  at  home. 

2222.  When  a  definite  tense  is  used  in  a  context  implying 
repetition,  the  definite  tense  does  not  share  in  this  meaning 
(for  repetition  is  expressed  by  indefinite  tenses,  §  2213), 
but  keeps  its  own ;  thus  his  temper  only  failed  him  when  he 
was  being  nursed  means  *on  each  occasion  when  he  was 
being  nursed ' — that  is,  the  definite  tense  applies  to  each  of 
the  repeated  phenomena  singly. 

H  2 


lOO  SYNTAX,  ■     [§2223. 

Tenses  in  Detail. 

Present. 

2223.  The  indefinite  present  is  a  neutral  tense  (289),  im- 
plying that  a  statement  is  of  general  application,  and  holds 
good  for  all  time  {f/ig  sun  rises  in  the  east),  or  that  an  action 
or  phenomenon  is  habitual,  as  in  he  gets  up  at  six  regularly 
every  morning  \  I  always  get  it  at  the  same  shop,  or  recurrent, 
as  in  he  goes  to  Germany  twice  a  year  \  whenever  she  sees  him, 
she  begins  to  laugh. 

2224.  If  the  actual  present  is  meantj  the  definite  form  is 
used  :  he  is  getting  up  now  \  where  are  you  going  ? 

2225.  The  definite  present  is  also  used  as  a  neutral 
present  to  show  that  continuity  and  not  repetition  is  meant 
(2213).  Thus  if  in  such  a  sentence  as  the  earth  is  a  ball 
that  is  always  turning  round,  and  at  the  same  time  it  moves 
round  the  sun  in  a  circle  we  substituted  turns,  we  should  have 
to  answer  the  question  '  when  does  it  always  turn  ? ' 

2226.  For  the  use  of  the  indefinite  moves  in  the  last  clause 
see  §  2220.  But  here  we  cannot  say  that  the  idea  of  revolving 
round  the  sun  is  either  subordinate  to  or  not  closely  asso- 
ciated with  that  of  revolving  on  its  own  axis.  It  seems  that 
the  shorter  indefinite  form  is  used  because  the  context  makes 
the  meaning  '  is  moving '  quite  clear.  Similarly  in  the  wind 
is  rising:  look  how  the  smoke  blows  sideways/  Here  we 
might  use  the  definite  form  is  blowing.  The  indefinite  form 
seems  to  suggest  'smoke  always  blows  sideways  when  the 
wind  rises.* 

2227.  The  vagueness  of  the  indefinite  present  makes  it 
possible  to  use  it  in  constructions  where  we  should  expect 
a  non-present  tense.  Thus  instead  of  saying  /  (have)  heard 
that  you  made  a  speech  yesterday,  we  might  say  I  hear  you  made 
a  speech  yesterday,  implying  '  various  people  told  me  so  and 
others  will  probably  tell  me  so  afterwards.'     Both  construe- 


§2331.]  VERBS  :   PRESENT, 


lOl 


tions  would  be  naturally  followed  by  the  question  who  told 
you  so  ? 

2228.  Statements  in  narratives  can  be  looked  at  from  the 
point  of  view  either  of  the  narrator  or  the  hearer ;  hence  the 
present  in  such  constructions  as  Gibbon  tells  us  in  his  History 
that . .  I  what  is  the  story  about i^  it  is  about  a  young  man  who 
goes  to  London  and  makes  his  fortune.  In  the  last  example 
the  present  is  extended  from  the  act  of  narration  to  what  is 
narrated.  This  is  the  germs  of  the  '  historical  present,'  used 
to  give  greater  vividness  to  a'  narrative:  he  mounts  the 
scaffold  .  .  the  executioners  approach.  The  fully  developed 
historical  present  seems  to  be  due  to  Old  French  and  Latin 
influence. 

2229.  In  describing  the  subject  of  a  picture  or  piece  of 
sculpture — which  appeals  directly  to  the  eye — the  definite  as 
well  as  the  indefinite  present  can  be  used :  it  is  a  represen- 
tation of  a  lady,  she  is  lying  on  a  couch,  at  the  side  of  the  couch 
sits  a  woman  as  in  grief  The  definite"  form  could  not  be 
used  in  stating  the  contents  of  a  book,  the  plot  of  a  story 
etc.  Observe  also  that  we  can  say  it  is  a  picture  of  a  lady 
lying  on  a  couch,  while  we  should  have  to  use  a  separate 
clause  in  /'/  is  a  story  of  a  lady  who  .  . 

2230.  In  such  a  construction  as  the  moon  halts  opposite  to  the 
window  at  which  I  sit — /  write  the  indefinite  present  is  used 
to  show  that  the  speaker  is  making  a  statement  which  will 
not  reach  those  for  whom  it  is  intended  till  it  has  come  to 
refer  to  the  past.  The  definite  present  might  also  be  used, 
but  would  imply  a  hearer  present  at  the  time,  or  else  that  the 
narrator  is,  as  it  were,  speaking  to  himself,  not  to  others. 

2231.  The  indefinite  present  is  regularly  used  instead  ol 
the  future  in  clauses  dependent  on  a  sentence  which  contains 
a  verb  in  the  future,  as  in  if  it  is  fine,  I  will  come  early, 
although  the  written  language  often  substitutes  the  future 
(2202  d).  The  present  is  also  used  instead  of  the  future  in 
some  independent  sentences.    In  does  the  moon  shine  to-night  i* 


I02  SYNTAX,  [§  2230. 

futurity  is  only  indirectly  implied  by  continuity  or  repetition, 
the  sense  being  '  is  to-night  one  of  the  nights  on  which  the 
moon  shines  ? '  The  full  future  meaning  of  the  present  in 
independent  sentences  is  most  frequent  when  futurity  is 
clearly  indicated  by  such  a  word  as  to-morrow :  to-morrow  ts 
bank  holiday  [this  falls,  at  the  same  time,  under  the  same  head 
as  the  preceding  example]  |  he  star  is  for  the  Continent  to-night. 
In  I  bet  you  anything  I'll  do  it!  futurity  is  not  marked  in  the 
principal  clause  because  of  the  necessity  of  keeping  will  in 
the  subordinate  clause  to'  indicate  the  combination  of  will 
with  futurity. 

2232.  The  definite  present  is  also  used  in  a  future  sense, 
but  only  in  combination  with  verbs  of  motion :  where  are  you 
going  for  your  holiday  this  autumn?  \  I  am  going  home 
to-morrow:  it  is  (2231)  my  mother s  birthday  \  is  anyone 
coming  to  dinner  ?  =  shall  we  have  any  guests  to  dinner?  It  is 
evident  that  where  are  you  going  ? — that  is,  '  where  are  you 
setting  out  for  at  this  moment  ? ' — implies  *  what  place  will 
you  arrive  at  ? '  Hence,  while  are  you  going  to  church  ?  is 
present  if  addressed  to  one  who  is  just  starting,  it  is 
necessarily  future  in  arc  you  going  to  church  to-day  ? 

Preterite. 

2233.  The  preterite  is  used  in  the  sense  of  the  neutral 
present  in  clauses  dependent  on  a  sentence  whose  verb  is  in 
the  preterite :  people  used  to  think  the  earth  was  flat  \  I  think 
I  once  heard  you  say  you  liked  it. 

2234.  In  some  cases  it  is  used  almost  as  the  equivalent  of 
a  full  present :  /  have  {got)  a  headache.  I  thought  you  were 
not  looking  well  \  I  hardly  ever  see  him  now.  I  thought  he 
was  an  intimate  friend  of  yours,  oh  no  I  In  these  examples 
thought  may  be  taken  in  the  sense  of  *  I  thought  when  I  first 
saw  you  just  now  .  .  ,*  *I  thought,  until  you  told  me  the 
contrary,  that  .  .  ,'  but  it  has  really  a  present  meaning — I 


§2241.]  VERBS:   PERFECT.  I03 

thought  you  were  not  looking  well  =^  yes,  you  don't  look  well ' 
— and  the  preterite  is  used  simply  to  avoid  the  suggestion  of 
contradiction ;  for  /  think  he  is  an  intimate  friend  of  yours 
would  imply  '  I  think  so  in  spite  of  what  you  say/  while  the 
preterite  implies  that  the  belief  is  already  a  thing  of  the  past. 

2235.  The  preterite  is  used  in  many  cases  where  we  might 
substitute  the  perfect  with  but  slight  change  of  meaning 
(275).  Other  examples  are:  who  took  my  book?  \  I  had 
hardly  any  breakfast,  but  I  do  not  feel  at  all  hungry. 

2236.  It  can  be  used  in  the  same  way  as  a  substitute  for 
the  pluperfect:  one  morning  when  they  woke  up,  they  saw 
a  ship  at  anchor  in  the  bay  \  the  donkey  never  stopped  till  he 
came  to  a  tent  of  gypsies.  Indeed  the  pluperfect  could  not  be 
used  in  either  of  the  examples,  the  two  events  being  regarded 
as  a  simple  sequence :  *  they  woke  up,  and  then  they 
saw  .  / 

2237.  The  definite  preterite  is  sometimes  equivalent  to  an 
indefinite  preterite  with  duration  implied  (2217). 

2238.  It  is  sometimes  equivalent  to  the  definite  perfect : 
/  am  afraid  we  have  kept  you  waiting,  oh  no,  not  at  all:  we 
were  looking  at  these  photographs.  Here  we  were  looking 
refers  to  an  implied  while  we  were  waiting  for  you,  and  so  is 
equivalent  to  we  have  been  looking. 

2239.  It  follows  from  §  2232  that  the  definite  preterite  of 
some  verbs  is  used  in  the  sense  of  the  future  preterite :  one 
day  he  told  his  housekeeper  that  four  gentlemen  were  coming  to 
dinner. 

Perfect. 

2240.  The  perfect,  being  intermediate  between  the 
present  and  the  preterite,  is  sometimes  used  in  constructions 
where  we  might  expect  one  or  other  of  these  tenses. 

2241.  It  is  equivalent  to  the  present  in  I  have  got  a  cold= 
'  I  have  caught  a  cold/  '  I  have  a  cold.'  In  /  have  brought 
back  the  book  you  lent  me  ;  that  is  why  I  have  called  we  could 


I04  SYNTAX.  [§  224a. 

not  substitute  the  present  for  the  last  perfect.  In  a  letter  we 
should  say  /  enclose  a  receipt  \  I  herewith  return  the  book 
which  you  lent  me  because  at  the  time  of  writing  they  have 
not  yet  been  received. 

2242.  The  perfect  is  often  used  instead  of  the  preterite  to 
express  something  which,  although  already  detached  from  the 
present,  is  connected  with  the  present  in  thought :  thank  you 

for  the  trouble  you  have  taken  \  you  have  not  tied  it  tight 
enough:  it  is  sure  to  come  undone  again  \  waiter  I  there  is 
something  wrong  in  the  bill:  you  have  made  this  sixpence  into 
six  shillings.  But  in  the  last  two  the  connexion  with  the 
present  is  shown  to  some  extent  by  the  accompanying 
sentences. 

2243.  The  perfect  is  used  instead  of  the  future  perfect  in 
clauses  dependent  on  a  sentence  with  a  verb  in  the  future,  as 
in  by  the  time  you  have  washed  and  dressed,  breakfast  will  be 
ready,  and  in  other  cases  where  the  future  meaning  is  clear 
from  the  context :  when  will  you  come  again  ?  as  soon  as  I 
have  finished  my  work  \  I  bet  you  half-a-crown  that  before 
nightfall  I  have  seen  him  1 

2244.  The  definite  perfect  (and  pluperfect)  emphasizes 
the  idea  of  duration  up  to  the  present  moment  (2211). 

2245.  But  as  the  element  of  duration  is  not  essential  to  the 
definite  tenses,  it  often  implies  something  that  has  happened 
immediately  before  the  present  time,  either  a  succession  of 
detached  events,  as  in  where  have  you  been  meeting  her  ? 
[compare :  have  you  met  her  lately  ?\  or  merely  a  single  event : 
his  bruised  face  and  torn  clothes  showed  that  he  had  been  fighting 
—  had  just  beeti  fighting  \  I  hear  you  have  been  getting  into 
mischief  again.     But  the  last  may  also  imply  repetition. 

2246.  But  this  usage  generally  requires  that  the  verb  itself 
implies — or  at  least  admits  of — the  idea  of  duration.  Thus 
in  I  have  just  received  a  letter  from  him  we  cannot  substitute 
the  definite  form.  But  we  can  say  /  have  been  receiving 
letters  from  him,  which  necessarily  imphes  repetition. 


§2251.]  VERBS:   PLUPERFECT.  105 

Pluperfect. 

2247.  We  have  seen  (2236)  that  the  pluperfect  is  often 
expressed  by  the  preterite.  Conversely  the  pluperfect  is  some- 
times used  where  the  preterite  would  do  as  well :  he  had  {got) 
a  cold  I  /  did  not  think  we  had  been  so  near  Scotland  \  he  told 
them  he  had  gone  for  a  little  walk,  and  saw  a  donkey.  .  In  the 
second  example  the  pluperfect  is  more  graphic  than  the  pre- 
terite, as  heightening  the  surprise  by  the  reminder  that  it  was 
too  late  to  take  advantage  of  the  knowledge.  In  the  last 
example  the  pluperfect  is  justified  by  the  fact  that  the  going 
for  a  walk  preceded  seeing  the  donkey,  and  it  is  used  here 
because  the  seeing  the  donkey  is  the  really  important  event, 
to  which  the  pluperfect  makes  it  subordinate.  In  be/ore 
breakfast  they  had  settled  the  whole  thing  the  pluperfect,  if  taken 
literally,  makes  the  exaggerated  statement  that  at  a  point  of 
time  before  breakfast  the  thing  had  been  settled,  whereas  all 
that  is  necessarily  meant  is  that  it  had  been  setded  at  break- 
fast— that  is,  that  they  settled  it  before  breakfast. 

2248.  The  definite  pluperfect  is  parallel  to  the  definite 
periect  (2244). 

Future. 

For  the  use  of  the  present  instead  of  the  future  see  §  2231. 

2249.  The  future  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  the  present 
in  such  phrases  as  this  will  be  the  Tower  0/  London,  I  suppose? 
= I  suppose  this  is  the  .  .  ,  meaning,  of  course,  '  this  will  turn 
out  on  investigation  to  be  .  /  This  usage  appears  to  be 
dialectal  (Scotch). 

2250.  The  definite  future  has  its  normal  meaning  in  the 
following  example :  /  shall  not  be  at  home  much  next  summer: 
I  shall  he  travelling  about  on  the  Continent  most  of  the  time 
parallel  to  the  definite  present  in  he  is  not  at  home  now  :  he  is 
travelling  about  on  the  Continent. 

2251.  But  it  has  often  peculiar  shades  of  meaning  of  its 


Io6  SYNTAX,  [§2253. 

own :  it  generally  gives  the  impression  that  the  future  event 
is  the  result  of  causes  with  which  the  speakers  have  nothing 
to  do;  and  hence  is  often  used  to  make  the  expression  of 
futurity  more  abstract,  and  especially  to  do  away  with  any 
associations  with  the  special  meanings  of  the  auxiliaries. 
Thus  even  in  the  preceding  example,  /  shall  travel  may  be 
taken  to  imply  that  the  travelling  will  be  the  result  of  a  reso- 
lution already  formed,  while  /  shall  be  travelling  predicts  it 
as  a  purely  objective  phenomenon.  So  also  /  suppose  you 
will  he  going  hack  to  England  soon  means  'you  will  probably 
go  back  to  England  soon  in  the  natural  course  of  events/ 
Hence  it  often  implies  that  the  future  action  is  the  natural 
result  of  something  in  the  character  of  the  person  of  whom  it 
is  predicted  :  and  novo  I  knovu  you  will  be  saying  you  cannot 
afford  it/\I  expect  some  fine  day  he  will  he  making  off  with 
the  money. 

Preterite  Futiire. 

2252.  The  following  are  examples  :  //  was  settled  thai  we 
should  meet  next  morning  at  the  same  place  \  I  knew  how  it 
ivould  turn  out. 

Of  the  definite  form  :  /  knew  that  as  soon  as  my  father  got 
to  Switzerland^  he  would  he  wanting  to  push  on  to  Italy, 

Perfect  Future. 

2253.  The  following  are  examples  :  by  this  time  to-morrow 
I  shall  have  crossed  the  Channel  \  he  wants  you  to  post  a  letter; 
he  will  have  finished  it  by  the  time  you  are  ready, 

2254.  Of  the  definite  form :  /  shall  have  been  writing  for 
six  hours  without  stopping  by  the  time  you  come  hack. 

Immediate  Future  (going  to  .  .). 

2255.  In  English  we  have  an  immediate  future  (284), 
formed  with  the  definite  tenses  of  go  and  the  supine,  as  in 
I  am  afraid  it  is  going  to  rain-=* .  .  it  is  about  to  rain,*  * .  .  it 
is  on  the  point  of  raining,'  compared  with  /  am  afraid  it  will 


§3359.1  VERBS:   SUBJUNCTIVE.  107 

rain  to-morrow.  Other  examples  are  :  what  are  you  going  to 
do  noiv  ?  I  am  going  to  call  on  some  ladies :  will  you  come  too  ? 
Sometimes  it  implies  a  less  degree  of  immediateness :  /  am 
going  to  call  on  him  soon :  I  shall  call  on  him  as  soon  as  I  can 
—in  a/av  days.  The  immediate  future  might  be  used  in  the 
last  sentence  as  well. 

2256.  This  form  is  perhaps  sometimes  used — like  the 
definite  future  (2251) — to  avoid  the  special  associations  of 
will  and  shall.  It  certainly  serves  that  purpose  in  the  last 
example  but  one. 

2257.  It  is  sometimes  used  not  to  disguise,  but  merely  to 
soften  down  the  idea  of  will  or  compulsion :  well,  if  you  are 
not  going  to  have  any  more  wine,  we  may  as  well  go  into  the 
garden— you  are  sure  you  will  not  have  any  more  wine  ?  Here 
will  might  imply  an  accusation  of  obstinacy. 

2258.  The  above  examples  are  all  of  the  present  imme- 
diate. There  is  also  a  preterite  :  what  were  you  going  to  do 
when  I  came  in  ?  I  was  going  to  take  a  walk.  There  do  not 
seem  to  be  any  other  tenses  in  actual  use. 

Moods. 

Subjunctive. 

2259.  In  Old-English  the  subjunctive  mood  is  in  full 
use  as  a  thought-mood  (298),  very  much  as  in  Modern 
German.  Thus  it  is  regularly  used  in  indirect  narration  : 
hie  cwcedon  pcet  he  ware  god  cyning  *  they  said  that  he  was 
a  good  king.'  But  when  the  indirect  statement  is  perfectly 
certain  in  itself,  and  not  merely  accepted  on  the  authority  of 
the  speaker,  it  is  put  in  the  indicative :  nU  we  willap  s^cgan 
bcBt  we /use  sind  Urne  eard  to  sedanne  *  now  we  wish  to  say  that 
we  are  starting  to  seek  our  country  '='  we  have  come  to  take 
leave.'  In  this  sentence  *say'  has  practically  hardly  any 
meaning,  the  whole  sentence  being  equivalent  to  we  sind 
fuse  .  . ,  so  that  the  subjunctive  would  be  too  emphatic :  it 


io8  SYNTAX,  [§2260. 

would  seem  to  imply  that  the  speakers  wished  to  hint  that 
their  statement  was  false. 

2260.  Such  exceptions  as  this  helped  the  natural  tendency 
to  get  rid  of  superfluous  distinctions  (307),  which,  again,  was 
helped  by  the  Late  West-Saxon  levelling  of  the  distinction 
between  subjunctive  and  indicative  in  the  preterite  plural  of 
all  verbs  (1188). 

2261.  Hence  in  Middle  English  the  subjunctive  was  soon 
disused  in  many  constructions — first  of  all  in  indirect  narra- 
tion ;  and  in  the  present  English  it  is  practically  extinct  as 
a  living  form,  surviving  only  in  a  few  isolated  constructions. 

2262.  Thus  we  still  keep  it  in  some  independent  sentences 
of  wish  and  command :  God  save  the  Queen  /  |  God  bless  you  !  \ 
bless  me  I  \  so  be  it  then  I 

2263.  The  phrase  woe  betide  .  .  expresses  not  wish,  but 
fear  of  the  future,  in  such  a  construction  as  woe  betide  us  if 
we  are  late! 

2264.  The  only  subjunctive  form  that  is  in  regular 
colloquial  use  is  the  preterite  were.  It  is  used  in  dependent 
sentences,  chiefly  in  clauses  of  rejected  condition  (305) :  if 
it  were  possible,  I  would  do  it  \  J  would  not  do  it  if  I  were 
you. 

2266.  Also  in  clauses  of  hypothetical  comparison :  he  is 
always  talking  about  honesty,  as  if  he  were  the  only  honest  man  in 
the  world.     Here,  again,  it  implies  rejection  of  the  statement. 

2266.  Lastly,  it  is  used  after  verbs  of  wishing  to  imply 
rejected  fulfilment — I  wish  I  were  at  home — as  opposed  to 
open  fulfilment,  as  in  /  wish  to  go  home,  the  first  example 
implying  *  I  am  not  at  home  now.'  So  also  in  she  says  she 
wishes  she  were  dead  \  would  that  I  were  free/ 

2267.  The  same  implication  of  rejection  is  inherent  in  the 
other  colloquial  uses  of  were :  it  is  time  we  were  gone — off. 

2268.  In  the  colloquial  language  of  the  last  century  there 
was  a  tendency  to  substitute  was  for  were,  even  in  clauses  of 
rejection. 


§2273]  VERBS:   SUBJUNCTIVE.  109 

2269.  In  Early  Modern  English  the  subjunctive  was  still 
in  colloquial  use  in  many  constructions  where  it  is  now 
obsolete. 

2270.  In  the  present  literary  language  the  subjunctive  is 
rapidly  falling  into  disuse — except,  of  course,  in  those  con- 
structions where  it  is  obligatory  in  the  spoken  language. 

2271.  It  is  otherwise  obligatory  in  the  written  language 
only  in  cases  of  verb-inversion  in  conditional  and  concessive 
clauses,  not  only  in  such  as  were  he  my  brother  .  .  =  '  even 
if  he  were  .  .  ,'  but  also  such  examples  as  were  it  scroll  or 
were  it  book,  into  it,  knight,  thou  must  not  look  (Scott)  |  come 
what  may,  I  will  stand  by  him  !  The  last  may  perhaps  be 
still  used  colloquially. 

2272.  Otherwise  the  subjunctive  is  little  used  in  ordinary 
literature  except  in  the  case  of  be,  and  that  in  most  cases 
only  in  combination  with  if.  But  even  within  these  limits 
the  usage  varies  greatly.  Those  who  have  been  trained  in  the 
use  of  the  subjunctive  by  Latin  prose  composition  and  by 
familiarity  with  its  use  in  the  earlier  English  literature  would 
instinctively  avoid  it  in  sentences  which  are  only  slightly 
hypothetical,  or  hypothetical  in  form  only,  such  as  if  there  is 
a  thunderstorm  some  way  off,  we  see  the  lightning  some  time 
before  we  hear  the  thunder  —  '  when  there  is  .  .  /  especially  in 
familiar  expressions  such  as  she  is  thirty,  if  she  is  a  day. 
Such  writers  would,  on  the  other  hand,  at  least  try  to  use  it 
consistently  in  such  constructions  as  if  it  be  necessary — 
which  I  very  much  doubt .  .  Some  of  them  will  occasionally 
use  it  with  other  verbs  than  be^  as  in  tfhe  please  one,  he  will 
offend  the  others,  and  in  other  constructions  than  those  with 
if.  not  only  in  constructions  similar  in  meaning  to  those  with 
if,  such  as  you  are  in  your  sphere,  humble  though  it  be  \  they 
will  not  do  it  unless  he  bid  them,  but  also  in  other  reminiscences 
of  the  earlier  freedom  : — 

2273.  /  pray  thee  that  thou  assert  my  innocence  \  look  that 
he  hide  no  weapon  \  see  that  there  be  no  traitors  in  your  camp  !\ 


no  SYNTAX,  [§2274. 

he /eels  if  the  axe  he  sharp  \  I  know  not  whether  it  be  true  or 
not  I  the  tree  will  wither  long  before  it  fall  \  wait  till  he  come  I 

2274.  In  the  above  examples  the  spoken  language  simply 
substitutes  the  indicative.  In  other  constructions  it  substitutes 
a  periphrastic  form.  Thus  in  the  following  it  requires  the 
conditional :  it  is  better  he  die  =  ;'/  is  better  he  should  die  \ 
I  tremble  lest  he  be  discovered  \  to  do  so  were  unnecessary.  In 
the  following  it  uses  the  permissive :  give  me  leave  that  I  may 
turn  the  key,  that  no  man  enter  =. .  .  so  that  no  one  may  come 
in  I  to  act  that  each  to-morrow  find  us  farther  than  to-day  | 
lest  justice  depart  out  of  the  land  =  so  that  justice  may  not 
depart  .  . 

2275.  But  the  general  literary  tendency  seems  to  be  to 
use  be  and  is  sporadically  and  almost  at  random  after  if  the 
uncolloquial  subjunctive  being  regarded  simply  as  a  mark  of 
the  higher  style,  which  is  therefore  unconsciously  dropped  in 
the  more  familiar  passages. 

2276.  The  artificial  subjunctive  is  particularly  objectionable 
when  the  mechanical  substitution  of  ivere  for  was  after  if 
leads  to  confusion  between  open  and  rejected  condition,  as 
when  were  is  substituted  for  was  in  such  sentences  as  if  he 
was  there,  I  did  not  see  him.  In  the  natural  spoken  language 
the  indicative  would  always  be  kept  here,  even  if  the  doubt- 
fulness of  the  hypothesis  were  made  as  prominent  as  possible 
by  distributed  stress  (1896) — if  he  ;was  there  .  .  if  he  were 
there  ought,  of  course,  to  imply  '  he  is  not  there,'  and  must 
then  be  followed  by  the  present  conditional  (2280),  so  that 
the  sequence  of  tenses  in  if  he  were  there ^  I  did  not  see  him 
makes  nonsense. 

Conditional. 

2277.  The  present  conditional  has  the  same  form  as  the 
preterite  future,  and  the  preterite  conditional  has  the  same 
form  as  the  perfect  future.  The  two  tenses  of  the  conditional 
have  also  definite  tenses,  like  the  parallel  forms  of  the  future. 


§228i.]  VERBS:    CONDITIONAL.  Ill 

2278.  The  main  practical  distinction  between  the  preterite 
future  and  the  conditional  is,  of  course,  that  the  latter  is 
dependent  on  a  preterite,  so  that  if  that  preterite  is  changed 
into  a  present,  the  would  of  the  preterite  future  necessarily 
becomes  will :  he  said  he  would  come — he  says  he  will  come, 
he  would  come  when  used  as  a  conditional  can,  on  the  other 
hand,  be  associated  with  a  present. 

2279.  Under  'conditional'  we  include  all  combinations  of 
would  and  should -with  infinitives  which  are  not  clearly  futures, 
even  when  their  functions  are  not  really  conditional.  But  as 
they  all  agree  in  being  moods  rather  than  tenses,  the  absolute 
practical  necessity  of  separating  the  mood-  from  the  tense- 
functions  of  these  periphrases  makes  it  all  the  more  desirable 
to  avoid  further  subdivision. 

2280.  The  most  important  function  of  the  conditional  is 
in  sentences  of  rejected  condition.  These  have  a  tense-mood 
(301)  in  the  hypothetical  clause,  and  a  conditional  in  the 
consequence-clause,  the  logical  present  being  expressed  by 
the  present  conditional  (with  the  preterite  indicative — sub- 
junctive in  the  case  of  were — in  the  hypothetical  clause),  the 
logical  preterite  by  the  preterite  conditional  (with  the  pluper- 
fect indicative  in  the  hypothetical  clause) : — 

Logical  present :  if  I  were  you,  I  would  not  do  it  \  he  would 
tell  me  if  he  knew — but  he  does  not  know  anything  about  it  \ 
I  should  like  to  try  if  I  were  not  afraid  \  if  he  were  travelling 
on  the  Continent,  he  would  not  be  seeing  the  sights  in  London. 
In  if  he  knew  it^  I  do  not  know  what  he  would  do  the  con- 
sequence-clause is  not  I  do  not  know,  but  is  contained  in  the 
clause  dependent  on  this  one  =  he  would  do  I  know  not 
what. 

Logical  preterite :  if  we  had  started  in  proper  time,  we  should 
have  been  there  by  this  time  \  it  would  have  been  better  if  you 
had  written  first,  to  find  out  whether  he  was  at  home  or  not. 

2281.  The  conditional  is  here  a  substitute  for  the  original 
subjunctive,  which   was    still   preserved   in    Early   Modern 


112  SYNTAX,  [§3282. 

English ;  thus  the  Old-English  gtf  pit  wkrc  her,  nctre  rnin 
hropor  dead  appears  in  the  Bible  as  if  thou  hadst  been  here, 
my  brother  had  not  died.  We  see  from  this  example  that  it 
was  the  ambiguity  of  the  consequence-clauses  which  led  to 
the  general  use  of  the  conditional,  the  germs  of  which  may 
be  found  in  Old-English  itself.  The  original  subjunctive 
construction  is  still  used  in  the  higher  literature  wherever  it 
can  be  done  without  ambiguity,  especially,  of  course,  in  the 
case  of  were:  it  were  a  pity  .  .  But  even  in  the  highest 
literary  style  such  a  construction  as  ^he  told  me  if  he  knew 
would  be  impossible. 

2282.  But  the  archaism  is  still  necessarily  preserved — in 
colloquial  as  well  as  literary  English — in  the  case  of  those 
anomalous  verbs  which  have  no  infinitives,  and  consequently 
no  conditionals :  he  could  do  ii  if  he  liked  —  he  would  be  able 
to  do  .  .\  if  we  had  started  in  proper  time,  we  might  have  been 
there  by  this  time. 

2283.  In  many  cases  the  present  conditional  does  not 
imply  rejection  of  the  hypothesis,  but  simply  shifts  its  conse- 
quences into  the  future,  as  in  if  we  missed  the  train,  we 
should  have  to  wait  an  hour  at  the  station,  which  means  if  we 
miss  the  train — which  I  hope  we  shall  not — we  shall  have  to 
wait .  .  The  only  way  of  definitely  rejecting  the  hypothesis 
is  by  putting  the  pluperfect  in  the  hypothetical  clause:  if  we 
had  missed  the  train,  we  should  {now)  have  to  wait  an  hour. 
Here  we  have  a  case  in  which  a  pluperfect  in  the  one  clause 
is  accompanied  by  a  present  instead  of  a  preterite  conditional 
in  the  other,  because  the  action  of  state  denoted  by  the  verb 
in  the  conditional  is  not  yet  completed ;  compare  if  we  had 
missed  the  train,  it  would  have  been  rather  awkward  [at  the 
time  when  we  missed  it). 

2284.  We  see  from  this  example  that  hypothetical  non- 
continuous  phenomena  require  the  pluperfect  to  show  dis- 
tinctly that  they  are  unreal.  It  is  indeed  difficult  to  think  of 
them  in  the  present  at  all :   it  is  at  any  rate  more  important 


§2290.]  VERBS:   MOODS.  TI3 

for  us  to  know  whether  or  not  we  have  caught  a  train  than 
to  realize  that  we  are  engaged  in  trying  to  catch  it  at  the 
present  moment. 

2285.  The  consequence-clause  of  conditional  sentences 
is  often  used  absolutely  with  a  variety  of  meanings.  It  is  so 
used  to  express  a  modest  wish,  request,  or  question,  some  such 
hypothetical  clause  as  '  if  it  were  possible,'  *  if  you  will  allow 
me — give  me  '  being  understood  :  /  should  like  a  glass  of 
water,  wouldtityou  rather  have  a  cup  of  tea?  \  he  says  he 
would  like  to  go  for  a  walk.     I  should  like  to  go  top. 

2286.  In  some  phrases  this  construction  has  come  to 
express  indignant  assertion — at  first,  probably,  ironically: 
I  should  {rather^  think  not! 

2287.  In  some  cases  the  absolute  clause  has  almost  a 
future  meaning :  (/  think)  you  would  like  it  {if  you  were  to 
try  if).  {I  am  sure)  I  should  like  it — //  would  suit  me  exactly  \ 
I  am  going  to  call  on  some  ladies  :  will  you  come  too  ?  (/  have 
no  doubt)  they  would  be  very  happy  to  make  your  acquaintance. 

2288.  The  absolute  conditional — which,  of  course,  does 
not  imply  rejection  of  any  kind — is  necessarily  kept  un- 
changed in  preterite  constructions  as  regards  tense,  but  with 
a  tendency  to  substitute  should  for  would',  he  said  he  should 
(or  would)  like  to  go  for  a  walk  \  he  said  he  was  sure  he 
should  like  it.  But  would  must  be  kept  in  /  said  I  was  sure 
he  would  like  it. 

2289.  In  a  preterite  context  the  absolute  conditional 
sometimes  expresses  wliat  is  to  be  expected,  what  happens 
as  a  matter  of  course :  men  began  with  ready-made  tools, 
they  would  soon  learn  how  to  cut  and  scrape  with  a  sharp 
piece  of  flint,  and  make  holes  with  a  sharp  tooth. 

2290.  The  absolute  conditional  is  sometimes  used  as 
a  cautiously  expressed  or  ironical  present :  in  short  you  must 
know  very  well  that  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Boffin  are  just  absolute 
perfection,  truly  it  would  seem  that  we  are  required  to  think 
so.     We  can  al^o  use  it  should  seem  in  the  same  sense. 

VOL.  II.  I 


114  SYNTAX.  [§2291. 

2291.  In  some  hypothetical  clauses  the  conditional  form 
is  used  to  express  indefinite  futurity,  as  in  if  he  should  call 
while  I  am  out,  tell  him  to  wait  \  if  you  should  happen  to  see 
him,  tell  him  to  expect  me  this  evening  about  eight,  the  same 
form  being  used  in  a  preterite  context  as  well :  she  said,  if  ht 
should  call  while  she  was  out,  I  was  to  tell  him  to  wait.  Here 
the  conditional  is  used  not  in  the  consequence-clause,  as  in 
sentences  of  rejected  condition,  but  in  the  hypothetical  clause. 
If  the  conditional  is  used  in  both  clauses,  the  general  char- 
acter of  the  hypothesis  is  determined  by  the  hypothetical 
clause;  that  is,  the  whole  sentence  implies  hypothetical 
futurity,  not  rejected  hypothesis :  if  he  should  see  me,  he  woula 
know  me  ■=z  if  by  chance  he  sees  me,  he  will  recognize  me. 

2292.  In  such  a  phrase  as  you  should  not  make  personam 
remarks  the  preterite  should  is  substituted  for  the  present 
shall  in  order  to  soften  down  the  imperativeness  oiyou  shah 
not  make  .  .  Here  there  is  no  conditional  meaning;  the 
should  keeps  its  original  meaning,  and  is  not  even  an 
auxiliary. 

2293.  In  the  following  examples  we  can  also  observe  the 
original  meaning  of  shall,  but  softened  down  so  that  the  shall 
becomes  a  pure  auxiliary:  why  should  you  suspect  him  ?  \  ii 
there  anyone  with  him  /  no  ;  who  should  there  be  ?  \  as  Iwem 
down  the  street,  who  should  I  meet  hut  our  friend  himself  i 
We  can  still  see  the  influence  of  the  original  meaning  in  the 
first  example  ('what  obliges  you  to  suspect  me?'),  furthei 
softened  down  in  the  second,  till  in  the  last  should  meet 
becomes  simply  a  periphrastic  preterite. 

2294.  It  will  be  observed  that  all  these  examples  are 
interrogative  in  form  only.  In  the  following  we  have  a 
similar  vague  use  of  the  periphrasis  in  declarative  sentences ; 
it  seems  odd  {that)  we  should  meet  here  \  it  is  strange  they 
should  have  met  in  the  very  same  place. 

2296.  In  the  following  examples  we  can  again  observe 
clearly  the  original   meaning  of  shall',    it  is  not  fair  thai 


§3301.]  VERBS:   MOODS.  I15 

/  should  suffer  for  other  people's  misconduct  \  it  is  quite  right 
that  he  should  bear  the  expense. 

2296.  But  in  the  following  parallel  construction  the 
original  meaning  of  the  auxiliary  is  quite  obscured :  /  am 
sorry  to  think  {that)  a  son  of  mine  should  behave  so  badly  at 
other  peoples  houses — should  have  behaved  so  badly  {on  that 
occasion). 

Compulsive  (is  to  .  .). 

2297.  This  periphrasis  primarily  expresses  necessity  and 
obligation  :  when  am  I  to  come  again?  \  do  not  forget  that  you 
are  to  be  there  exactly  at  five.  So  also  in  the  passive :  you 
know  what  is  to  be  done  \  the  doctor  says  he  is  not  to  be 
worried. 

2298.  The  passive  form  is  also  used  to  express  possi- 
bility :  where  is  it  to  be  found/*  \  he  is  not  to  be  found  any- 
where. 

2299.  In  a  hypothetical  clause  the  preterite  was  to  .  .  does 
not,  as  the  simple  preterite  would  do,  imply  rejection  of  the 
hypothesis  so  much  as  its  remoteness  or  improbability,  as  in 
what  should  we  do  if  it  were  to  rain  =  *  if  it  by  chance  comes 
on  to  rain.'  So  also  compare  tf  I  were  to  see  more  of  him, 
I  could  speak  to  him  about  it  with  tf  I  saw  more  of  him  .  . 
While  the  second  implies  '  I  do  not  see  much  of  him,'  the 
first  implies  *  I  may  see  more  of  him  in  the  future.' 

2300.  There  is  also  a  peculiar  traditional  use  of  this  form 
in  the  phrase  that  is  to  say  :  he  was  very  eccentric,  that  is  to 
say,  he  did  odd  things  that  made  people  laugh. 

Permissive  (may). 

2801.  The  verb  may  in  its  full  meaning  implies  possibility 
as  the  result  of  the  absence  of  external  hindrance,  especially 
through  the  interference  of  others,  whence  its  frequent 
meaning  of  '  have  permission,'  *  be  allowed  to ' ;  while  can 

I  2 


Ii6  SYm-AX.  [§2302. 

implies  possibility  as  the  result  of  something  in  the  subject 
of  the  statement,  such  as  strength,  capacity,  or  knowledge : 
may  I  climb  that  tree  ?  yes  :  you  may,  if  you  can. 

2302.  In  the  above  example  may  is  a  full  verb ;  but  in 
many  cases  the  combination  may  or  »2z^^/+ infinitive  is  used 
as  a  true  mood  having  much  the  same  function  as  the  old 
subjunctive. 

2303.  Thus  the  present  permissive  is  used  in  independent 
sentences  to  express  wish  :  may  you  succeed!  \  may  it  please 
your  Grace  to  hear  me  I  In  this  construction  there  is  now 
always  verb-inversion,  which  is  not  always  the  case  in  Early 
Modern  English.  This  construction  is  not  much  used  in  the 
third  person  (singular),  because  the  simple  subjunctive  is  here 
distinctive  enough  (2262) — [may)  God  bless  you  / 

2304.  The  combination  wz^  4- infinitive  is  sometimes  used 
as  a  kind  of  future:  this  place  is  not  safe:  the  roof  may  come 
down  any  day.  it  is  safe  enough  for  the  present :  the  roof  may 
not  come  down  yet.  It  will  be  observed  that  in  the  negative 
consti-uction  of  the  last  sentence  the  original  meaning  of  may 
is  almost  lost — may  not  come  down  here  =  *  will  probably  not 
come  down.'  In  itself  it  might,  of  course,  also  mean  *  is  not 
allowed  to  come  down.' 

2305.  In  the  same  way  the  combination  »z/^/^/+ infinitive 
in  independent  sentences  is  used  to  soften  a  request  by  making 
it  more  indirect,  as  in  inight  I  ask  .  .  ?  \  might  I  be  allowed  to 
ask  .  .?  —  '  may  I  ask  .  .  ? '  Here  may  is  still  a  full  verb. 
Compare  the  parallel  use  of  should  (2285). 

2306.  In  dependent  sentences  the  permissive  is  used  to 
imply  various  degrees  of  impossibility  and  uncertainty. 

2307.  In  the  following  concessive  sentences  the  indicative 
forms  may  be  substituted  without  much  change  of  meaning, 
and  yet  the  original  full  meaning  of  the  may  is  still  felt: 
although  it  may  seem  incredible,  it  is  nevertheless  true  \  incredible 
as  it  may  seem,  there  is  no  provision  for  the  teaching  of  phonetics  \ 
whatever  the  reason  may  be,  the  fact  remains  \  whatever  hts 


§3313.]  VERBS:    VOICE.  117 

former  conduct  may  have  been,  his  circumstances  should  exempt 
him  from  censure  now. 

2308.  In  the  following  object-clauses  may  keeps  much 
of  its  original  meaning,  and  cannot  be  omitted :  /  beg  thai 
I  may  not  be  interrupted  \  oh  that  I  might  recall  him  from  the 
grave  I 

2309.  In  the  following  object-clauses  the  indicative  may 
be  substituted  without  much  change  of  meaning:  I  hope  it 
may  be  so  \  they  were  a/raid— they  thought  he  might  have  been 
carried  off  by  gypsies = they  were  a/raid  he  had  been  carried  off. 

2310.  The  use  of  the  permissive  is  especially  important  in 
clauses  of  result  and  purpose :  let  the  dog  loose  that  he  may 
have  a  run  \  we  let  the  dog  loose  that  he  might  have  a  run  \ 
let  us  hide  the  brandy  for  fear  he  may  drink  it  all  up  \  we  put 
the  milk  on  the  shelf  for  fear  the  cat  might  get  at  it  \  speak,  {so) 
that  I  may  hear  you  /  In  the  present  spoken  language  we 
can  no  longer  substitute  the  indicative  or  subjunctive — such 
constructions  as  lest  he  drink  are  literary  and  archaic. 

2311.  In  the  preterite  we  can  substitute  should  for  might : 
for  fear  he  should  drink  it  all  up.     Here  should  suggests  the 

idea  of  the  result  being  in  itself  inevitable,  or  as  probable, 
while  might  suggests  it  only  as  a  possibility.  It  is  to  be 
observed  that  even  in  the  literary  language  the  periphrastic 
forms  must  be  used  in  the  preterite ;  we  cannot  write  */^x/  he 
drank. 

Voice  (Active  and  Passive). 

2312.  The  definite  active  forms  are  occasionally  used  in 
a  passive  sense :  that  house  has  been  building  a  long  time  \  there 
is  an  answer  waiting  =  *  .  .  being  waited  for.'  This  is  the 
result  of  the  Modern  English  gerunds  having  originally  been 
abstract  nouns  (1257),  which,  of  course,  are  neutral  as  regards 
the  distinctions  of  voice. 

2313.  In  Old-English  only  transitive  verbs  could  be  used 
in  the  passive.     Verbs  which  governed  any  other  case  than 


Il8  SYNTAX.  [§2314. 

the  accusative  could  not  be  put  into  the  passive.  Thus  there 
is  no  passive  form  corresponding  to  he  pancode  hire  '  he 
thanked  her.'  But  as  soon  as  the  distinction  between  dative 
and  accusative  was  lost,  it  was  inevitable  that  from  the  active 
he  thanked  her  should  be  formed  the  passive  she  was  thanked. 
To  us,  thank  is  as  much  a  transitive  verb  as  praise.  But  we 
still  hesitate  over  and  try  to  evade  such  passive  constructions 
as  she  was  given  a  watch  \  he  was  granted  an  audience  htc^MSt 
we  still  feel  that  she  and  he  are  in  the  dative,  not  the  accusative 
relation. 

Infinitive  and  Supine. 

2314.  Of  the  large  number  of  verbs  which  take  the  infini- 
tive in  Old-English  the  greater  number  are  now  followed  by 
the  supine. 

2315.  The  substitution  of  the  supine  for  the  infinitive 
began  in  Old-English  itself.  Thus  the  supine  of  purpose,  as 
in  hte  comonpcet  land  to  sceawienne  '  they  came  to  spy  out  the 
land,'  gradually  supplanted  the  older  infinitive  with  many 
verbs  of  desiring,  intending,  attempting,  etc.,  so  that  while 
such  a  verb  as  willan  '  will  *  continued — as  it  still  does  in 
Modern  English— to  take  the  infinitive  only,  other  verbs  of 
similar  meaning,  such  as  wilnian  *  desire,'  together  with  such 
verbs  as  on-ginnan  *  undertake,  begin,'  began  to  take  the 
supine  as  well  as  the  infinitive.  In  Middle  and  Modern 
English  the  gradual  loss  of  the  inflections  of  the  infinitive 
contributed  further  to  extend  the  use  of  the  more  distinct 
supine. 

2316.  In  Modern  English  the  auxiliary  verbs  always  take 
the  infinitive.  So  also  do  most  of  the  defective  and  analogous 
verbs,  such  as  can^  must,  dare  [but  /  dared  him  to  do  it\.  But 
need  has  both  infinitive  and  supine,  and  ought  has  only  the 
supine,  have  takes  the  infinitive  not  only  when  an  auxiliary, 
but  also  in  its  other  transitive  uses  {^hat  would  you  have  him 


§2325-]       VERBS:   INFINITIVE  AND   SUPINE.  II9 

do?),  but  takes  the  supine  in  the  sense  of 'must':  j/(7«  will 
have  to  do  it. 

2317.  The  full  verbs  that  take  the  infinitive  are  mostly  verbs 
of  feeling  and  perception,  such  ?is/eel  {I felt  my  heart  heat\ 
see  (I  saw  him  go  out),  hear,  find  [find  pleasure  end  in  pain). 
But  many  verbs  of  this  kind  take  the  supine  :  I  perceived  him 
to  be  .  . 

2318.  The  three  verbs  bid  (now  obsolete  in  the  spoken 
language),  make  {;we  made  him  come  in),  let  still  keep  the 
infinitive,  while  the  others  of  similar  meaning  have  the  supine. 

2319.  The  infinitive  is  also  kept  after  the  groups  had  better, 
had  (now  would)  rather :  we  had  better  go  home  now.  I  woula 
rather  stay  a  little  longer. 

2320.  It  is  to  be  observed  that  the  supine  is  regularly  used 
after  passive  verbs — including  those' which  in  the  active  take 
the  infinitive :  he  was  heard  to  say  .  .  \  he  was  made  to  come 
[but  it  need  not  be  seen^. 

2321.  The  infinitive  is  sometimes  used  absolutely :  what, 
not  know  me  I  \  why  not  go  there  yourself  i*  |  why  complain  ? 
But  as  the  infinitive  has  no  distinctive  form  of  its  own,  it  is 
a  question  whether  we  do  not  rather  feel  it  to  be  the  mere 
neutral  verb-base  in  such  constructions.  We  feel  the  vague- 
ness of  the  form  still  more  in  such  groups  as  cough-no-more 
lozenges,  where  the  verb  may  also  be  felt  to  be  an  imperative. 

2322.  In  rather  than — sooner  than  yield  he  resolved  to  die 
the  infinitive  is  not  absolute,  but  is  dependent  on  the  follow- 
ing verb,  the  to  of  the  supine  being  omitted  on  the  analogy  of 
such  constructions  as  he  would  rather  die  than  yield. 

2323.  The  supine  is  used  absolutely  in  the  subject-relation : 
to  be  good  is  to  be  happy  \  it  is  pleasant  to  see  oneself  in  print, 

2324.  It  is  also  used  elliptically :  but  how  to  get  in  !  {that 
is  the  question).  Hence  it  is  so  used  in  adverbial  phrases :  to 
tell  the  truth,  I  do  not  know  much  about  it  \  to  be  sure  {it  is)  / 
=  'certainly.' 

2325.  In  Old-English  the  supine  is  used  in  a  passive  sense 


I20  SYNTAX,  [§2326. 

to  express  what  must  be  or  ought  to  be  done  :  paping  pe  to 
donne  sind  '  the  things  which  are  to  be  done/  We  still  keep 
up  this  passival  use  in  the  phrase  a  house  to  let ;  but  as  we 
cannot  do  this  with  other  verbs,  we  have  to  use  the  passive 
form  in  such  constructions  as  this  house  is  to  he  let  or  sold^ 
whence  there  is  a  tendency  to  say  a  house  to  be  let.  Originally 
these  passival  uses  were  probably  simply  ambiguous :  td 
donne  meant  indifferently '  for  some  one  to  do '  or '  to  be  done 
by  some  one/ 

Gerund. 

2326.  When  the  supine  is  substituted  for  the  gerund  in 
the  subject-relation,  it  seems  to  bring  out  more  strongly  the 
attributes  of  phenomenality — action  and  quickness;  thus  to 
see  is  to  believe  means  *  seeing  is  immediately  followed  by  be- 
lieving,' while  seeing  is  believing  means  *  seeing  as  a  general 
rule  is  followed  by  belief/  We  could  hardly  substitute  the 
gerund  for  the  infinitive  in  to  know  him  is  to  love  him  without 
weakening  the  sense — still  less  in  to  be  or  not  to  be,  that  is  the 
question.  In  there  is  no  getting  rid  0/  him  the  gerund  must  be 
used  because  the  supine  cannot  take  such  an  adjunct  as  no. 

2327.  Some  verbs,  such  as  like,  prefer,  can  take  either  the 
supine  or  the  gerund  in  the  object-relation.  Here,  again,  the 
general  difference  between  /  like  to  get  up  early  and  /  like 
getting  up  early  seems  to  be  that  the  latter  implies  duration 
and  habit.     But  it  is  often  difficult  to  see  any  distinction. 

2328.  In  the  combination  possessive  -|-  gerund,  as  in  /  do 
not  like  his  coming  here  so  often,  the  oblique  case  may  be  sub- 
stituted for  the  possessive,  so  that  the  gerund  becomes  a 
present  participle :  /  do  not  like  him  coming  here  so  often. 
The  difference — if  any — appears  to  be  that  in  the  former 
construction  the  logical  emphasis  is  on  the  possessive,  in  the 
latter  on  the  verb.  But  there  seems  also  to  be  a  tendency 
to  give  up  the  latter  construction  altogether,  as  if  it  were 
a  mere  variation  of  /  do  not  like  him  to  come  here  so  often.    In 


§8334-]  VERBS:    GERUND.  121 

the  following  examples  we  could  hardly  alter  the  possessives : 
in  honour  of  its  being  Christmas  day  \  when  metal  came  into 
use,  men  were  able  to  make  their  knives  much  longer,  without 
their  being  afraid  of  their  breaking.  In  the  last  sentence  the 
their  could  be  omitted,  but  not  changed  into  them. 

2329.  So  also  the  genitive  in  who  toldyou  of  your  wife^s 
being  there  ?  may  be  made  into  the  common  case  —  of  your 
wife  being  there.  In  such  constructions  as  /  cannot  accept  the 
notion  of  school-life  affecting  the  poet  to  this  extent  the  common 
case  is  preferred  to  the  genitive. 

2330.  Although  the  ing-ioxm  after  the  objective  or  common 
case  is  formally  a  participle,  we  certainly  do  not  feel  that 
coming  in  /  do  not  like  him  coming  here  modifies  him  in  the 
same  way  as  it  does  in  /  saw  him  coming :  coming  in  the 
former  sentence  is,  in  fact,  a  half-gerund. 

2331.  As  we  have  seen,  we  recognize  the  gerund  element 
in  the  former  sentence  by  our  instinctive  tendency  to  regard 
him  coming  as  a  substitute  for  his  coming.  It  is  important  to 
note  that  the  absence  of  a  distinction  between  common  case 
and  genitive  in  the  plural  often  makes  it  impossible  in  the 
spoken  language  to  distinguish  between  gerund  and  half- 
gerund,  as  in  to  prevent  the  ladies  leaving  us,  I  generally 
ordered  the  table  to  be  removed  (Goldsmith),  where  the  purely 
orthographic  alteration  of  ladies  into  ladies*  would  make 
leaving  into  a  full  gerund. 

2332.  But  leaving  in  this  sentence  could  also  be  made 
into  a  full  gerund  by  making  it  inio  from  leaving.  In  pardon 
me  blushing  we  could  in  the  same  way  either  change  me  into 
my  or  insert/br. 

2333.  Indeed,  there  seems  little  doubt  that  the  colloquial 
half-gerunds  in  such  causal  constructions  as  she  caught  cold 
sitting  on' the  damp  grass  |  he  tears  his  clothes  climbing  trees 
have  arisen  through  dropping  a  preposition. 

2334.  The  half-gerund  in  these  last  two  examples  can 
easily  be  made  into  a  full  participle  by  a  mere  change  of 


122  SYNTAX.  [§  3335. 

order,  though  the  result  will  be  a  very  stilted  literary  form — 
she,  sifting  (or  having  sat)  on  the  damp  grass,  caught  cold. 

2335.  In  several  of  the  other  half-gerund  constructions  the 
participle  can  be  substituted  by  a  change  of  construction. 
Thus  I  enjoy  being  here  suggests  I  /eel  enjoyment  while  beiftg 
here. 

2336.  The  constructions  which  most  resist  this  change  are 
those  which  also  allow  the  substitution  of  a  possessive  or 
genitive  for  the  preceding  objective  or  common  case,  for  the 
change  of  /  do  not  like  him  coniing  here  into  /  do  not  like  him 
when  coming  here — when  he  comes  here  involves  a  distinct 
change  of  meaning. 

Participles. 

Present. 

2387.  The  present  participle  is  sometimes  used  in  a  passive 
sense  in  some  definite  tenses  (2312). 

2338.  Allied  to  this  is  the  peculiar  use  of  the  adjective 
participle  in  falling  sickness  =  *  illness  in  which  the  patient 
falls/  dying  day,  parting  glass^  waking  vision.  That  the  first 
element  is  really  a  participle  is  shown  by  the  even  stress,  and 
also  by  the  Old-High- German  vallandiu  suht ;  if  it  were 
a  noun,  as  in  dining-table,  sleeping-apartment,  there  would  be 
uneven  stress  (900). 

2339.  When  the  present  participle  is  added  to  an  intran- 
sitive verb,  it  is  logically  partly  in  a  kind  of  apposition  to  the 
verb,  and  at  the  same  time  qualifies  the  subject :  he  came 
running  =  *  he  ran  up '  \  the  fog  came  pouring  in  at  the 
window  I  /  cannot  go  on  doing  nothing.  In  the  first  two 
examples  came  is  so  subordinated  in  meaning  to  the  par- 
ticiple that  it  is  felt  almost  as  an  auxiliary.  This  is  often  still 
more  the  case  when  the  participle  is  joined  to  a  verb  of  rest, 
as  in  he  lay  sleeping  compared  with  he  was  sleeping  \  he  stood 
looking  on. 


§2347.]  VERBS:   PARTICIPLES.  123 

2340.  When  it  is  added  to  a  direct-object  word,  it  is 
associated  sometimes  more  closely  with  the  preceding  transi- 
tive verb,  as  in  /  saw  htm  coming  up  the  road^  sometimes 
rather  with  the  object- word,  as  in  /  have  kept  you  waiting. 

2341.  The  difference  between  /  j^zw  him  coming  and  I  saw 
him  come  is  that  the  former  is  more  descriptive,  the  latter  more 
a  statement  of  a  bare  fact. 

2342.  In  the  preceding  constructions  the  participle  is  run 
on  to  the  words  it  modifies  without  a  break.  In  the  follow- 
ing constructions  there  is  generally  a  more  or  less  distinct 
pause  or  change  of  intonation,  the  result  of  which  is  that  the 
participle  or  participle-group  is  felt  to  be  equivalent  to 
a  dependent  clause. 

2343.  When  equivalent  to  a  relative  clause,  such  a  group 
may  be  regarded  simply  as  a  post-adjective-group  (1788),  so 
that  in  such  a  sentence  as  here  are  my  letters  announcing  my 
intention  to  start  a  pause  after  letters^  though  allowable,  is  not 
necessary. 

2344.  Such  groups  may  be  used  to  modify  sentences  in 
various  ways,  which  are  often  difficult  to  define  exactly. 
Thus  in  she^  dyings  gave  it  me  the  participle  is  evidently 
equivalent  to  a  temporal  clause,  while  in  seeing  a  crowd, 
I  stopped  the  group  can  be  expanded  into  when  I  saw  .  .  or 
because  1  saw  .  .  ,  although  the  causal  meaning  is  not  so  clear 
as  in  not  having  received  an  answer,  I  wrote  again, 

2345.  This  vagueness  is,  of  course,  one  of  the  reasons' 
why  this  construction  is  often  preferred  to  that  with  a  de- 
pendent clause,  especially  in  the  literary  language.  Compare 
composition  (1560). 

2346.  On  the  other  hand,  these  participle-groups,  through 
having  the  same  function  as  dependent  sentences,  have  come 
to  adopt  some  of  the  grammatical  peculiarities  of  the  latter. 

2347.  Thus  they  can  take  conjunctions  whenever  clearness 
seems  to  make  it  desirable,  as  in  Mac  Ian,  while  putting  on 
his  clothes  and  calling  to  his  servants  to  bring  some  refreshmefit 


124  SYNTAX,  [§  2348. 

/or  his  visitors,  was  shot  through  the  head  \  I  wrote  a  similar 
epitaph/or  my  wife,  though  still  living  compared  with  dogood^ 
hoping  for  nothing. 

2348.  A  participle-group  introduced  by  a  conjunction  no 
longer  requires  to  be  placed  next  to  the  word  it  modifies,  as 
in  the  preceding  examples,  but  may  be  detached  from  it: 
t  nor  ever  did.  I  love  thee  less,  though  mourning  for  thy 
wickedness. 

2849.  The  groups  we  have  hitherto  been  considering  all 
modify  some  definite  word,  but  there  are  others  which  are, 
logically  speaking,  complete  sentences,  having  their  own 
subject  and  predicate.  When  grammatically  disconnected 
from  any  one  word  in  the  accompanying  sentence,  they 
modify  that  sentence  as  a  whole,  as  in  t  we  sitting,  as  I  said, 
the  cock  crew  loud=while  we  were  sitting,  .  .  \  soon  afterwards 
the  truth  revealed  itself,  the  real  criminal  confessing  the  crime. 

2350.  This  absolute  construction  is  found  already  in  Old- 
English,  in  which  it  appears,  however,  not  as  a  nominative, 
but  as  a  dative  absolute  {Us  sittendum),  being  an  imitation  of 
the  Latin  ablative  absolute.  In  Middle  English  we  have  an 
oblique  absolute,  which  is  due  rather  to  the  influence  of  the 
Old-French  accusative  absolute  than  to  any  tradition  of 
the  Old-English  construction.  It  lasted  into  the  Modern 
period  {us  sitting),  where  it  was  kept  up  mainly  by  the  vague 
analogy  of  the  Latin  ablative  absolute.  The  change  of  us 
sitting  into  we  sitting — which  began  already  in  Middle 
English — was  of  course  the  inevitable  result  of  the  desire  of 
getting  rid  of  the  oblique  forms  in  their  anomalous  position- 
at  the  head  of  a  logical  sentence. 

2361.  The  absolute  participle-construction  is  not  only  un- 
coUoquial,  but  is  by  many  felt  to  be  un-English,  and  to  be 
avoided  in  writing  as  well. 

2352.  The  logical  subject  of  such  a  group  is  sometimes 
repeated  in  the  accompanying  sentence  in  the  form  of 
a  pronoun,  as  in  our  guest  offering  his  assistance,  he  was 


§2356.1  VERBS:   PARTICIPLES,  125 

accepted  among  the  number;  or  a  pronoun  in  the  group  may 
refer  to  a  noun  in  the  sentence :  neither  could  he  suspect  that 
he  had  missed  his  way,  it  being  so  broad  and  plain. 

2353.  By  the  analogy  of  the  absolute  construction, 
participle-groups  without  a  logical  subject  are  sometimes 
used  absolutely.  This  harsh  construction  is  quite  a  man- 
nerism with  some  writers,  such  as  Richard  Jefferies,  as  in  the 
two  following  examples,  taken  from  a  single  page :  crossing 
to  the  other  side  0/ the  bridge,  and  looking  over,  the  current  had 
scooped  away  the  sand .  .=' when  I  had  crossed  .  .  I  found 
that  the  current  .  /  |  carefully  looking  over  that  side  again,  the 
moorhen  who  had  been  out  rushed  back.  In  the  last  example 
it  is  only  the  context  that  tells  us  it  was  not  the  moorhen  who 
looked  over  the  side  of  the  bridge,  but  the  author  himself. 

2354.  This  is  an  extreme  development  of  constructions 
such  as  besides,  being  rebels,  all  their  acts  are  illegal,  where 
the  group  is  an  adjunct  to  the  pronoun  implied  by  the 
possessive. 

2355.  The  omission  of  the  logical  subject  is  natural 
enough  in  adverbial  phrases :  talking  of  subscriptions,  here  is 
one  to  which  your  lordship  may  affix  your  name  \  my  father 
had,  generally  speaking,  his  temper  under  complete  control.  In 
the  first  example  talking  of  is  evidently  a  shortening  of  while 
we  are  talking  of  Such  phrases  may  be  worn  down  till  the 
participle  becomes  a  preposition  such  as  concerning. 

Preterite. 

2356.  The  preterite  participle  is  sometimes  used  in  an 
active  sense,  as  in  a  learned  man.  The  Old-English  form 
was  gelared,  literally  'taught,*  being  a  translation  of  the 
Latin  doctus ;  when  l(sran  became  obsolete,  the  participle  of 
learn  was  substituted,  necessarily  in  the  sense  of  *  having 
learnt.'  Other  examples  are  drunk{en),  mistaken,  the 
obsolete  drawn  in  why  are  you  drawn  i*  =  *  why  have  you 
drawn    your    sword?',  which,  like  learned,    are,   logically, 


126  SYNTAX.  [§  2357. 

perfect  participles.  In  the  obsolete  well  spQken  =  '  eloquent  * 
*  plausible/  spoken  is  equivalent  to  an  indefinite  present 
participle.  The  preterite  participle  of  intransitive  verbs  has 
an  active  sense  in  periphrastic  forms  such  as  /le  is  gone. 

2357.  The  preterite  participle  is  also  used  in  constructions 
analogous  to /ailing  sickness  (2338),  as  in  the  vulgar  tn  all 
my  born  days  I  never  saw  such  a  rascal,  where  born  days 
= '  time  since  I  was  born,  life-time.* 

2858.  The  preterite  participle  after  intransitive  verbs 
stands  in  the  same  relation  to  verb  and  subject  as  the  present 
participle  does  under  similar  circumstances,  as  in  he  sat 
buried  in  thought  \  but  the  predicative  function  of  the  preterite 
participle  is  much  more  marked  than  that  of  the  present, 
especially  when  the  verb  is  weakened  to  a  mere  link-verb : 
to  stand  convicted  \  to  get  married  \  to  become  distinguished  \  to 
be  known. 

2359.  It  is  added  to  a  direct-object  word  in  the  same  way 
as  the  present  participle  :  /  saw  it  done  \  I  saw  it  being  done  \ 
I  will  see  it  done  =  /  will  have  it  done  \  he  declared  himself 
satisfied  \  do  you  not  wish  him  gone?  In  the  last  example 
the  participle  has  an  active  sense. 

2360.  The  preterite  participle  may  be  added  to  a  pre- 
dicative noun:  that  is  a  good  thing  done  parallel  to  I  saw 
a  good  thing  done  (2359).  Here  the  participle  is  connected 
in  thought  directly  with  the  preceding  verb — '  I  saw  the  doing 
of  a  good  thing.'  The  similar  addition  of  the  participle  to 
a  subject- word  is  only  literary :  a  Deity  believed  is  joy  begun 
—  *  the  belief  in  a  Deity  is  the  beginning  of  joy.' 

2361.  After  a  preposition-group  it  generally  has  quite 
a  different  function,  as  in  people  often  fight  without  any  mis- 
chief done  (Sheridan).  Here  done  is  felt  to  be  a  substitute 
for  being  done — which  would,  indeed,  be  the  more  general 
form  of  expression — so  that  it  is  really  a  kind  of  half-gerund 
(2330).  So  also  in  they  set  him  free  without  his  ransom  paid 
(Shakespeare). 


§2367]  VERBS:   PARTICIPLES.  1 27 

2362.  But  in  some  cases  the  participle  remains  a  pure 
adjective  after  a  preposition-group,  as  in  ^fortune  is  famous 
for  her  numbers  slain. 

2363.  A  group  headed  by  a  preterite  participle  when 
equivalent  to  a  relative  clause  is  generally  run  on  without 
pause,  as  in  <7  Ufe  wasted  in  the  vain  pursuit  of  pleasure^ 
though  a  pause  is  also  admissible,  as  in  I  am  the  sister  of  one 
Claudio,  condemned  to  lose  his  head. 

2364.  A  variety  of  other  relations  are  expressed  by  joining 
on  (with  a  pause)  a  preterite-participle  group :  once  seen,  it 
can  never  be  forgotten  \  planned  merely,  'tis  a  common  felony  ; 
accomplished,  an  immortal  undertaking  \  which,  testified  or  not, 
does  verily  remain  the  fact. 

2365.  Here,  again,  the  relation  may  be  made  clearer  by 
conjunctions :  when  once  seen  \  if  planned  merely  \  whether 
testified  or  not  \  if  deceived,  I  have  been  my  own  dupe. 

2366.  There  is  an  absolute  preterite  particle,  as  in  this 
done,  find  the  councillor  I  \  which  said,  he  sat  down,  but  its 
use  is  more  hmited  than  that  of  the  absolute  present  participle. 
It  is  very  little  used  with  pronouns  in  the  subject-relation 
(«j  dispossessed,  he  once  passed),  because  a  preterite  participle 
after  a  nominative  is  generally  not  distinguishable  from 
a  finite  preterite. 

2367.  The  following  examples  contain  constructions 
parallel  to  present-participle  ones :  ithus  repulsed,  our  final 
hope  is  flat  despair  (2352)  |  thus  saying,  he  took  up  his  hat .  . 
when  gone,  we  all  regarded  each  other  for  some  minutes  with 
some  confusion  (2358). 


INDEX 


The  references  are  to  the  paragraphs. 


a  article  229. 

a-  1569. 

absolute  55  ;  a.  adjectives  2068 ; 

a.  pronouns  203. 
abstract  30  ;  a.  nouns  165. 
accidence  581,  945. 
accusative  131. 
acoustic  qualities  of  vowels  673 ; 

a.  sound-changes  717. 
active  311,  2312. 
'Od  1 700. 
-ade  1702. 
adjective    96,    176,    1023,    2068; 

a.-clause  498  ;  a.-word  103. 
adjunct-word  40,  90. 
adverb  102,  336,  1496;  a.-clause 

499. 
adverbial  object  251. 
adversative  conjunctions  417. 
ag'  1571. 
affirmation  1518. 
affirmative  conjunctions  414;    a. 

sentences  501. 
after- clause  466. 
■age  1703. 
agreement  91. 
-a/ 1730. 

all  211  \  all  the  234. 
alternative  conjunctions  415;    a. 

questions  505. 
although  418. 
-an  1735. 
-ana  1707. 
anacoluthia  118. 
analogy  535. 
analysis,  phonetic  650. 

VOL.  II.  K 


-ance  1708. 

-ancy  1709. 

and  /{o\,  414. 

-ane  1735. 

Angles  598. 

Anglian  602. 

Anglo-Frisian  596. 

Anglo-Saxon  603. 

-ant  1742. 

antecedent  217  ;  a.  verb  221. 

antigrammatical         constructions 

116. 
antilogical  119. 
any  230. 

appended  clauses  473. 
apposition  90,  47  note, 
-an  683,  1744. 
-ard  1687. 

Arian  languages  595. 
-art  1687. 

articles  201 1 ;  a.  omitted  2049. 
-ary  1745. 
Aryan  =  Arian. 
as  370. 
aspirate  708. 

assimilation,  phonetic  720. 
association  20 ;  a.-group  523. 
assumptive  44. 
-ate  1716,  1751. 
attraction  117. 
attribute  28,  44, 
auxiliary  ^242. 

back-consonants  699  ;    b.  vowels 

671. 
back-pointing  pronouns  225. 


I30 


INDEX, 


base  74. 

be  1488. 

^e-  1572,  1575- 

bear  vb.  1439. 

beat  vb.  1403. 

because  423. 

/^<f^«  1385. 

^««ar  1326. 

bereave  131 2. 

^/af  1394. 

bide  1 41 9. 

/^/W  1364. 

^///f  1409. 

blade    consonants    702 ;    b.- point 

consonants  702. 
-ble  1719,  1720. 
blend  1327. 
blending  125. 
blow  1452. 
-bond  1 721. 
^<?M  235. 
break  1431. 

breath  sounds  651  ;  b.-group  453. 
bring  1339. 
broad  vowels  672. 
broken  intonation  1948  ;  b.  order 

i860  ;  b.  quantity  233. 
huild  1324. 
■bund  1 721. 
bum  1304. 
burst  1354. 
but  1^11 . 
buy  1 32 1. 

can  1478. 

cardinal  numerals  239. 

case  949,  1985. 

cast  1344. 

catch  1336. 

categories,  grammatical  and  logi- 
cal 24,  25. 

causal  conjunctions  423. 

causative  verbs  250. 

Celtic  influence  607. 

changes  in  language  511. 

chide  141  o. 

choose  1437. 

class-nouns  150. 

clauses  49,  463 ;  c.  of  purpose 
396. 

cleave  1313. 


climax-stress  1893. 

climb  1 41 8. 

cling  \i^\. 

close  vowels  672. 

clothe  1335. 

Cocicney  dialect  647. 

co-clauses  463. 

co-complexes  465. 

co-conjunctions  426. 

cognate  languages  (to  English) 
312  ;  c.  object  253. 

collective  nouns,  150,  151,  158; 
c.  pronouns  235. 

colloquial  576. 

combinative  sound-changes  719. 

come  1406. 

common  case  140,  1985  ;  c.  nouns 
150. 

comparative  degree  1 76  ;  c.  gram- 
mar 5. 

comparison  of  adjectives  176, 
1036  ;  c.  of  adverbs  1523,  2081. 

complete  tenses  281. 

complex  462  ;  c  sentences  49  ;  c. 
words  62. 

composition  62,  1545. 

compound  conjunctions  400  ;  c- 
falling  tone  661 ;  c.  preposi- 
tions 385  ;  c.-rising  tone  661  ; 
c.  tenses  274 ;  c.  words  62. 

compulsive  mood  300,  2297. 

concessive  clause  295  ;  c.  conjunc- 
tions 418. 

concord  91. 

concrete  30 ;  c.  nouns  1 50. 

condensation  112. 

condensed  relative  220. 

conditional  300,  2277;  c.  sen- 
tences 295. 

conjoint  55. 

conjugation  242. 

conjunctions  102,  399. 

conjunctive  adverbs  373 ;  c.  pro- 
nouns 221. 

connected  names  160. 

connective  88. 

consonant-influence  754. 

consonantal  verbs  1285. 

consonants  653,  691. 

continuous  quantity  232  ;  c.  tenses 
283. 


INDEX, 


131 


contracted    complexes    and    sen- 
tences 488. 
contrasting  stress  1890. 
convergent  sound-changes  730. 
conversion  of  parts  of  speech  105. 
converted  verb  255. 
co-ordinate  sentences  460. 
co-ordination  44,  89. 
co-ordinative  426. 
copulative  conjunctions  4 1 6. 
correlative  370,  15 14. 
creep  1295, 
cross-order  1865. 
'Cy  1699. 

dare  1480. 

dative  132. 

dead  phenomena  588^ 

declarative  sentences  501. 

declension  150. 

declinable  100. 

definite  article  224,  2013;  d.  pro- 
nouns 201,  224,  1 144  ;  d.  tenses 
288,  2203. 

demonstrative  pronouns  225, 11 15. 

dependent  adverbs  369;  d.  pro- 
nouns 199  ;  d.  sentences  459. 

deponent  verbs  316. 

derivation  69,  1562. 

derivative  words  62. 

descriptive  grammar  2,  586. 

detached  clauses  491  ;  d.  conjunc- 
tions 431 ;  d.  prepositions  396. 

dialects  574. 

dictionary  583. 

dig  1370. 

dight  1345. 

diphthongs  ^d^i^  686. 

direct  narration  297 ;  d. object  131. 

discrete  quantity  232. 

distract  1.^37. 

distributed  stress  1896. 

divergent  sound- changes  721. 

do  1493  ;  do-iQxxas,  2169. 

-dom  1601. 

doublets  54,  520,  1912, 

draw  1456. 

drink  1386. 

drive  1420. 

dual  127. 

dwell  1305, 


each  235 ;  e.  other  210. 

-ean  1738. 

Pearly  (period)  594. 

East-Anglia  601. 

East-Arian  595. 

East-Germanic  596. 

eat  1402. 

■ed  adj.  ending  1606. 

-ee  1682. 

-eer  1683. 

either  235  ;  cither  .  .  .  or  415. 

ellipse  III,  534. 

emphasis  1765. 

emphatic  pronouns  205  ;  e.  stress 

1885;    e.   verb-forms    317;    e. 

word-order  554. 
empty  words  58  ;  e.  sentences  450. 
-en  adj.  1607  ;  vb.  1616. 
-ettce  1708. 

enclitic  stress- weakening  1899. 
-ency  1709. 
-end  I S)^ J. 
end-position  1759. 
endings  70. 
English  603. 
enough  234. 
-ent  1742. 
-er  1592,  1683. 
-ese  1747. 
-esque  1750. 
-ess  1688,  1698. 
-et  1693. 
even  stress  1897. 
every  235. 
exclamation-words    and    -groups 

438. 

exclamative  sentences  502. 

explanatory  grammar  3. 

extended  complexes  473;  e.  sen- 
tences 486. 

external  sound-changes  512,  718. 

extra  stress  1881. 

-ey  1694. 

fact-form  and  -statement  294,  303. 
/all  1404. 

falling  intonation  66 1« 

familiarization  541. 
feel  1316. 

feminine  145. 
few  235. 


K  2 


132 


INDEX. 


fight  1438. 

Jind  1365. 

finite  verb  103. 

first  XI 70. 

fixed  order  1760, 

fiee  1294. 

fiing  137a. 

fiy  vb.  1450. 

-fold  161 1. 

for  conj.  423. 

for-  1573- 

form  53. 

formal  16  ;  f.  analogy  540;  f.  syn- 
tax 58  a. 

formulae,  stress  of  1894. 

form-words  58. 

forsake  1447. 

forward  consonants  703. 

forward-pointing  pronouns  325. 

free  adjectives  178,  2070;  f.  groups 
440 ;  f.  order  1 760. 

freeze  1432. 

freight  vb.  1443. 

French  influence  610,  622. 

front-clause  466 ;  f.  consonants 
700 ;  f.-modified  consonants 
706;  f.-order  1867;  f.-position 
1759 ;  f.-vowels  671. 

ful  161 2. 

full  word  58;  f.  diphthongs  687. 

function  of  parts  of  speech  97. 

future  273,  2249;  f.  perfect  277; 
f  preterite  278. 

•fy  1756. 

^^-1574- 

gender    142,   947;    g.    of   nouns 

1953. 
genealogical  86  note, 
general  grammar  6;  g.  interrogative 

sentences  503 ;  g.  words  37. 
generalizing  use  of  words  39. 
genitive  133,  1996. 
Germanic  596. 

gerund  loi,  324,  1257,  2326. 
get  1414- 
give  1407, 
glides  664. 
go  1458. 
government  94. 
gradation  770. 


grammar,  definitKon  of  f  ;   g.  and 

dictionary  583. 
grammatical  difficulties  589 ;    g. 

analysis  591 ;  g.  gender  146. 
grave  vb.  1459. 
grind  12,66. 
group-association     20 ;     g.-com- 

pound  440  ;   g.-influence   535  ; 

g. -prepositions     386 ;     g.- verbs 

251,  394. 
grozv  1454. 

half-conjunctions  409 ;  h.-diph- 
thongs  686 ;  h.-long  658 ; 
h.-strong  659. 

hang  1 369. 

have  1452;  h.-iorms  of  verbs 
2165. 

he  200. 

head-word  40,  90. 

hear  1300. 

heave  1433. 

her  203. 

here-in  etc.  379. 

hew  1460. 

hide  vb.  141 1. 

high  vowel  673. 

hight  1474. 

his  203. 

historical  grammar  4,  586. 

history  of  English  594  ;  h.  of  lan- 
guage 511. 

hold  1403. 

homonyms  55,  55a. 

-hood  1602. 

hortation  308. 

hypothetical  conjunctions  419. 

/200. 

-iac  1727. 
-ial  1730, 
-ian  1739. 
-ic  1722. 
-ical  1 731. 
-ice  1698. 
-icism  1 715. 
iclept  1475. 
-id  1700,  1728 
idioms  448. 
-ier  1683. 
*/4i9- 


INDEX. 


133 


-He  1734. 

imitative  sound-changes  512,  717; 
i.  words  544. 

immediate  future  284. 

imperative  308  ;  i.  sentences  506  ; 
i.-interrogative  sentences  508. 

impersonal  verbs  257. 

-in  1740. 

incapsulation  470. 

inchoative  tenses  305. 

incomplete  tenses  381. 

indeclinable  100. 

indefinite  article  239,  3041  ;  i.  pro- 
nouns 329,  1 146  ;  i.  tenses  288. 

independent  adverbs  358,  409 ; 
i.  pronouns  199 ;  i.  tenses  459, 
280  note;  i.  verbals  330. 

indicative  398. 

individual  nouns  150 ;  i.  name- 
words  158. 

indirect  government  134;  i.  in- 
terrogation 314;  i.  narration 
397  ;  i.  object  133. 

'ine  1740. 

infinitive  loi,  331,  3314. 

inflection  73;  i.  of  word-groups 
1016. 

inflectional  languages  86. 

•ing  1594,  1600. 

inner  position  707. 

inserted  clauses  467. 

instrumental  134. 

intensive  stress  1886. 

interjectional  words  544. 

interjections  103,  433,  154a. 

internal  sound-changes  716. 

interrogation  314. 

interrogative  pronouns  an,  11 38, 
21 19  ;  i.  sentences  503  ;  i.  verb- 
forms  317. 

interval  663. 

intonation  661,  1925. 

intransitive  348. 

inverted  object,  subject  313. 

-ion  1706. 

-ior  1 746. 

irregularity  23,  526. 

-ise  1698,  1758. 

-ish  1609,  1757. 

•ism  1714. 

K 


isolating  languages  86. 

isolation  21,  525. 

isolativ«  sound-changes  719. 

-ist  1689. 

it  300. 

-ite  1690,  1 75 1. 

its  303. 

■itiide  I'ji'j. 

•ive  1755, 

-i%e  1758. 

Jutes  598. 

-kin  1590. 
knit  1357. 
know  1455. 

-Ictcan  1618. 

language,  definition  of  16, 

Late  (period)  594. 

Latin  influence  606,  625. 

leady\i.  1461. 

leap  1296. 

learn  1306. 

learned  words  625. 

least  234. 

leave  13 19. 

lend  1328. 

-lent  1743. 

less  234. 

-less  1613. 

lest  435. 

let  1349. 

'let  1693. 

level  intonation  661. 

lexical  side  of  language  1 8. 

lie  1405. 

light  vb.  1408. 

-//«^I595. 

link-verbs  263. 

lip  consonants  704. 

literary  language  576. 

little,  al.  2^j^ 

living  phenomena  588. 

load  yh.  1461. 

locative  135. 

-lock  1603. 

logical  control  of  sound-changes 

533 ;    1.  side  of  language  16 ; 

1.   syntax   583;    1.   word-order 

553. 
London  dialect  619. 


134 


INDEX, 


long  quantity  658  ;  1.  tenses  283. 

loose  1323. 

loss  of  sounds  723. 

Low  German  596. 

low  vowels  673. 

-ly  1614. 

make  vb.  1334. 

many  235. 

mark-words  35,  195. 

masculine  145. 

material  nouns  150. 

may  1481. 

mean  vb.  1320. 

meanings  of  words  5 1 3. 

medium  quantity  658;  m.  stress 
659. 

melt  1462. 

-ment  1704. 

Mercian  601. 

metaphor  514. 

mid  position  1759  ;  m.  vowel  672. 

middle  clause  468  ;  m.  voice  316. 

Middle  English  594,  613,  771. 

mine  203. 

mixed  complexes  493  ;  m.  sequen- 
ces 493;  m.  verbs  1457;  m. 
vowels  671. 

Modem  English  594,  629,  823. 

modification  115, 

modifiers  40. 

modifying  form-word  88  ;  m.  stress 
1891. 

monophthongs  667. 

moods  293,  2259. 

more  234,  235. 

morphological  86  note. 

most  234,  235. 

mote  vb.  1482. 

mow  vb.  1463. 

much  234. 

murmur-diphthongs  688, 

must  vb.  1482. 

mutation  751  ;  m.-plurals  1002. 

my  203. 

name-words  157. 

nasal  consonants  696 ;  n.  sounds 

652  ;  n.  vowels  685. 
natural  gender  146. 
-nd  1591. 


needvh.  1487. 

negation  1518. 

negative  conjunctions  416 ;  n.  in- 
flection 77  ;  n.  pronouns  236  ; 
n.  sentences  501 ;  n.  verb-forms 

317. 
neither  2,^5,  336,  416. 
-ness  1597. 
neuter  145. 
neutral  tenses  289. 
no  adverb  368  ;  pronoun  230,  336. 
nobody  236. 
nominative  129. 
nor  416. 
Northern  601, 
not  365. 
nothing  236. 
noun  96,  126,  945  ;  n.-clause  497 ; 

n.-word  103. 
number  of  nouns  127,  1966 ;  n.  of 

verbs  269,  2145. 
numerals  101,  237,  11 59,  3143. 

object-complement  267. 

objective  case  141. 

oblique  cases  1 39. 

of-  1576. 

-oid  1729. 

Old-English  594,  598. 

on-  1577. 

one  noun  201  ;  numeral  237  ;  pro- 
noun 210. 

open  condition  305 ;  o.  consonants 
693 ;  o.  vowels  673, 

optative  398. 

or  conj.  415. 

-or  1684,  1710. 

order  of  words  1 760. 

ordinal  numerals  239. 

organic  sound-change  512,  716. 

origin  of  language  544 ;  o.  of  parts 
of  speech  560. 

-ory  1 71 1. 

-ose  1748. 

other  231,  235. 

ought  vb.  1483. 

our  203. 

-our  1684,  1 7 10. 

-ous  1748. 

outer  position  707. 

own  pronoun  206,  209. 


INDEX. 


135 


parenthesis  (kind  of  sentence)  471. 
parenthetic  sentences  471. 
participles  loi,  330,  2337. 
particles  loa,  1494. 
parts  of  speech  95,  98. 
passival    supine    322  ;     p.    verbs 

249. 
passive  voice  312,  2312, 
patronymics  162. 
perfect  275,  2240, 
periods  of  English  594. 
periphrase-verbs  320. 
periphrastic  verb-forms  24a. 
permissive  mood  300,  2301. 
person   of  pronouns    200;    p.    of 

verbs  270,  2155. 
personal   gender   211 ;    p.  names 

162  ;    p.   pronouns   200,   1058, 

2095. 
personification  1962. 
phenomena  29. 
philosophical  grammar  6. 
phonetics  648  ;   phonetic  analogy 

540- 

phonology  648. 

pitch  662. 

pluperfect  276,  3247. 

plural  127;  p.  nouns  152. 

point  consonants  701. 

popular  words  625. 

positive  degree  176. 

possessive  pronouns  203,  1093, 
2105. 

post-position  1759. 

predicate  42. 

prefixes  70. 

prepared  sentences  403,  458. 

pre-position  1759. 

prepositional  complements  251. 

prepositions  102,  383,  1528 ;  pre- 
position-groups 387. 

Present  English  639,  879. 

present  tense  273,  2223. 

preterite  273,  2233;  p.-present 
verbs  121 1. 

primary  clause  475 ;  p.  com- 
pounds 67  ;  p.  conjunctions  399 ; 
p.  prepositions  383;  p.  tenses 
379. 

principal  clause  463. 

progressive  relative  218. 


pronominal  adverbs  1508;  p.  con- 
junctions 1 5 16. 
pronouns  loi,  189,  1053,  2095. 
prop- words  180. 
proper  names  150. 
purpose,  conjunctions  of  425. 

qualifiers  34. 

qualifying  attribute-words  36. 

quantitative  pronouns  232,  1152. 

quantity  658. 

quit  1358. 

quoth  1473. 

r  in  English  71 1. 

-rceden  1604. 

reach  vb.  1342. 

reciprocal  pronouns  210;  r.  verbs 

356. 
recurrent  tenses  283. 
redundance  no. 
reference-pronouns  325. 
reflexive  pronouns  207 ;  r.  verbs 

254;  r.  voice  316. 
rejected  condition  305.. 
relative  adverbs  373  ;  r.  pronouns 

217,1138,2123. 
retained  object  315, 
ridvh.  1359. 
ride  142 1. 
rise  1423. 

rising  intonation  661. 
rive  1464. 

rounded  consonants  705. 
rounding  669. 
ru7t  1383. 
-ry  1712. 

same  228. 

saw  vb.  1465. 

Saxons  598. 

say  1293. 

Scandinavian  596,  608. 

second  ii*io. 

secondary  clause  4.75 ;  s.  com- 
pounds ;  s.  conjunctions  399 ; 
s.  prepositions  384;  s.  tenses 
279. 

see  vb.  1445. 

seek  1 341. 

seethe  1416. 


136 


INDEX, 


self  2ot^i  207,  1 104. 

sill  1302. 

sentences  446  ;  sentence-adverbs 
368;  s.-antecedent  217;  s.-con- 
necting  conjunctions  403 ;  s.- 
group  452,  453 ;  s.-introducing 
adverbs  369  ;  s.-modifying  ad- 
verbs 364;  s.-stress  84  note, 
1881  ;  sentences  of  wish  296 ; 
sentence-vt^ords  49,  452,  545. 

separative  pronouns  235. 

sequences  482. 

set  vb.  1350. 

several  235. 

shake  1448. 

shall  1484,  2196. 

shape  vb.  1466. 

shave  1467. 

she  200. 

shear  1444. 

shed  vh.  1351. 

shifting  120. 

-ship  1605. 

shoe  vb.  1 301, 

shoot  1417. 

short  quantity  658  ;  s.  tenses  283. 

show  1468. 

shred  I7,e^2, 

shrive  1423. 

shut  1347. 

"Stan  161 7. 

side  consonants  694. 

simple  conjunctions  400  ;  s.  tenses 
274  ;  s.  words  62. 

singular  nouns  152 ;  s.  number 
127. 

sink  1390. 

'Sion  1706. 

sit  1383. 

slay  145 1. 

sleep  1297. 

sling  \h.  1373. 

slink  1374. 

slit  vb.  1360. 

smite  1424. 

smoothing  720. 

j^  377,  424;  so  ,.  .as  370. 

some  230,  235. 

•some  1610. 

sound-change  512,  715. 

Southern  dialects  602 . 


sow  vb.  1469. 
speak  1434. 

special  words  38,  39  ;  s.  interroga- 
tive sentences  504. 
spin  1375. 
sptt  vb.  1384. 
split  infinitive  1864. 
spoken  language  576, 

spread  i^f^Z- 

stand  vh.  1446. 

standard  dialect  573. 

stave  vb.  1430. 

steal  1435. 

'Ster  1593. 

stick  yh.  1376. 

stink  1392. 

stopped  consonants  695. 

strata  of  language  646. 

stress  659  ;  s. -doublets  521. 

strew  1470. 

stride  vb.  1425. 

strike  1368. 

string  vh.  1378, 

j/r»W  1426. 

strong    inflection    948;    s.   stress 

659  ;  s.  verbs  1190. 
sub-conjunctions  437. 
subject  42  ;  s. -clause  463 ;  s.-com- 

plex  465. 
subjunctive  298,  2259. 
subordinate  44,   89;    s.   sentence 

460. 
subordinative  conjunctions  427. 
substances  28. 
such  227. 
suffixes  70. 
superlative  176. 
supine  243,  321,  2314. 
swear  1440. 
sweep  1298.      ( 
swell  1 47 1. 
-sy  1699. 
syllables  666. 
symbolic  words  544. 
synonyms  522. 
syntax  581,  1759. 
synthesis,  phonetic  656. 

./  1751. 
take  1449. 
-te  I7j5i. 


INDEX. 


137 


teach  1343. 

tearvh.  1441. 

te/l  1303. 

temporal  conjunctions  421. 

tenses  271,  2163,  2223;  tense- 
mood  301. 

-M  1599. 

Maw  380. 

fhai  adverb  374;  conjunction  of 
purpose  425 ;  dem.  pronoun 
225  ;  relative  216. 

Mtf  225. 

ihee  200. 

fAeir  303. 

rkere  344  note ;  therein  etc.  379. 

therefore  424. 

thmk  1340. 

Mw  225. 

M^«  200. 

though  418. 

thought-form  294,  302,  303. 

thrive  1427. 

throat-sounds  651. 

thy  204. 

-//^;/  1706. 

to-  1579. 

tones  661. 

transition  periods  594. 

transitive  248. 

tread  141 5. 

trilled  consonants  697. 

triphthongs  667. 

-trix  1691. 

-ty  1 718. 

•u  1598. 
•m/;  169a. 
«»- 1580. 

unconnected  names  160. 
ungrammatical  12. 
unless  419. 

unprepared  sentences  403. 
-ure  1 713. 
-«/^  1 75 1. 

verbals   loi,    319;     verbal-group 
445. 


verbs  96,  240,  1177,  2145;  ano- 
malous V.  1287;  iiregular  v. 
1292. 

vocalic  verbs  1285. 

vocative  130. 

voice  311,  651,  2312. 

vowels  654,  668,  674;  vowel-like 
consonants  655. 

vulgar  575. 

wake  1429. 

wan-  1581. 

-ward  1615. 

we  2  GO. 

weak  sounds  660 ;  w.  stress  659  ; 
w.  verbs  1202, 

wear  vb.  1442. 

weave  1436. 

weep  1299. 

wendvh.  1333. 

West-Arian  595. 

West-Germanic  596. 

what  211,  relative  216. 

wherein  etc.  379. 

which  211,  relative  216. 

Wi4<>  211,  relative  216. 

xvhole  234. 

ivillwh.  1485,  2196. 

win  1380. 

wind\h.  1367. 

wist  vb.  i486. 

wont,  be  1476. 

words  51,  81,  83,  84;  word-con- 
necting conjunctions  403 ;  w.- 
formation  62 ;  w.-groups  50, 
440 ;  w.-introducing  adverbs 
369 ;  w.-modifying  adverbs  358; 
w.-order  1759. 

workvh.  1338. 

wot  vb.  i486. 
write  1428. 

•y  1608,  1694. 
yes  368. 
you  200, 
your  203. 


PRINTED   IN    ENGLAND 
AT   THE    OXFORD    UNIVERSITY    TRESS 


MIDDLE    ENGLISH 


SIR  GAWAIN  AND  THE  GREEN 
KNIGHT.        Edited    by   J.    R.    R. 
Tolkien  and  E.  V.  Gordon.     Crown 
8vo.     Pp.  xxviii +  212.     7s.6d.net. 
At  the  Clarendon  Press. 

A  STUDY  OF  GAWAIN  AND 
THE  GREEN  KNIGHT,  by  G.  L. 

KiTTREDGE.      8vO.      Pp.   332.      lOS.  6d, 

net.  Harvard  University  Press. 

SELECT  EARLY  ENGLISH 
POEMS,  edited  by  Sir  I.  Gollancz. 
Fcap  4to. 

I.  Patience,  an  alliterative  version 
of  Jonah  by  the  Poet  of  Pearl. 
Pp.  58.     5s.  net. 

II.  The  Parlenunt  of  the  Thre  Ages. 
An  alliterative  poem  on  the  Nine 
Worthies  and  the  Heroes  of  Ro- 
mance.    Pp.  116.     5s.  net. 


III.  A  Good  Short  Debate  between 
Winner  and  Waster.  An  alliterative 
poem  on  Social  and  Economic  Pro- 
blems in  England  in  the  year  1352, 
with  Modern  English  Rendering. 
5s.  net. 

IV.  St.  El kemvald{)i\s\\oTp  oihon- 
don  675-693).  An  alliterative  poem, 
written  about  1386,  narrating  a 
miracle  wrought  by  the  Bishop  in 
St.  Paul's  Cathedral.  Pp.  112. 
5s.  net. 

VII.  Cleanness.  An  alliterative 
tripartite  poem  on  the  Deluge,  the 
Destruction  of  Sodom,  and  the  Death 
of  Belshazzar,  by  the  Poet  of  Pearl. 
Pp.  114.     5s.  net. 

VIII.  Pearl.  An  English  poem  of 
the  Fourteenth  Century.  Pp.  348. 
25s.  net 

Oxford  University  Press,  London. 


^    Olker  Romances, 


KING  HORN,  a  Romance  of  the 
Thirteenth  Century,  with  text  of 
Home  Childe,  edited  by  Joseph  Hall. 
Pp.  Ivi  +  238.     145.  net. 

At  the  Clarendon  Press. 


THE  LAY  OF  HAVELOK  THE 
DANE.  Second  edition,  revised  by 
K.  SisAM.  Fcap  8vo.  Pp.  212. 
4s.  6d.  net.     At  the  Clarendon  Press. 

SIR  EGLAMOUR,  a  Middle  English 
Romance,  edited  by  A.  S.  Cook. 
Pp.  148.     5s.  net. 

Yule  University  Press, 

August  ig2j 


IWAIN,  by  A.  C.  L.  Brown; 
ARTHUR  AND  GORLAGON,  by 
G.  L.  Kitthedge.  8vo.  Pp.  vi  + 
276.     los.  6d.  net. 

Harvard  University  Press. 

STUDIES  ON  THE  LIBEAUS 
DESCONUS,  by  W.  H.  Schofield. 
Pp.  iv  +  246.     8vo.      los.  6d.  net. 

Harvard  University  Press. 

MEDIAEVAL  ROMANCE  IN 
ENGLAND.  Astudy  of  the  Sources 
and  Analogues  on  the  Non-Cyclic 
Metrical  Romances,  by  Laura  A. 
HiBBARD.  Med  8vo.  Pp.  viii  +  342. 
17s.  6d.  net. 

U.xford  University  Press, 

A  merican  Branch. 


^  Tiers  Tlowman. 


THE  VISION  OF  WILLIAM  CON- 
CERNING PIERS  THE  PLOW- 
MAN, in  three  parallel  texts,  together 
with  Richard  the  Redeless,  by  William 
Langland.  Edited  with  preface, 
notes,  and  glossary  by  W.W.  Skeat. 
Two  volumes.  Pp.  636,  xcvi  +  484. 
50s.  net.  Ai  the  Clarendon  Press. 


WILLIAM  LANGLAND'S  PIERS 
THE  PLOUGHMAN  (the  B  text, 
about  A.  D.  1377).  Edited  by  W.  W. 
Skeat.  Ninth  edition.  FcapSvo.  Pp. 
xlviii  +  216.     4s.  6d.  net. 

At  the  Clarendon  Press. 

PIERCE  THE  PLOUGHMAN'S 
CREDE  (about  a.d.  1394^.  Edited 
with  introduction  and  notes  by  W.W. 
Skeat.  Fcap  8vo.  Pp.  xxxii  +  74. 
2S.  6d.  net.     At  the  Clarendon  Press. 


5  John  Gower. 


THE  COMPLETE  WORKS  OF 
JOHN  GOWER,  edited  with  intro- 
ductions, notes,  glossaries,  and  fac- 
similes by  G.  C.  Macaulay.  Four 
volumes  48s.  net,  or  each  volume 
i6s.  net. 

Vol.  I.   The  French  Works.     Pp. 
Ixxxviii  +  564,  with  facsimile. 

Vols.  II  &  III.    The  English  Works. 
Pp.  clxxvi  +  520,  656,  with  facsimile. 


Pp. 


Vol.  IV.  The   Latin  Works. 
Ixxviii  +  430,  with  facsimile. 

At  the  Clarendon  Press. 


GOWER'S  CONFESSIO  AMAN- 
TIS,  selections  edited  with  intro- 
duction, notes,  glossary,  and  index, 
by  G.  C.  Macaulay.  Fcap  8vo. 
Pp.lii  +  252.     5s. 

At  the  Clarendon  Press, 


^   Qhaucer. 


THE  WORKS  OF  GEOFFREY 
CHAUCER  and  Chaucerian  and 
other  Pieces,  edited  with  introduc- 
tions and  notes  by  W.W.  Skeat.  Vols. 
I-VII,  with  portrait  and  facsimiles  ; 
the  set  of  seven  volumes  105s.  net, 
or  each  volume  i6s.  net. 

At  the  Clarendon  Press. 

THE  CLERKES  TALE,  illustrated 
edition,  with  introduction,  notes,  and 
glossary  by  K.  Sisam.  1923.  Pp. 
xxvi  +  78.     2S.  3d.  net. 

At  the  Clarendon  Press. 

THE  COMPLETE  WORKS  OF 
GEOFFREY  CHAUCER  IN  POE- 
TRY AND  PROSE,  together  with 
the  two  fragments  of  the  Romatint  of 
the  Rose  not  by  Chaucer,  with  intro- 
duction, appendix  of  variations  and 
emendations,  and  two  glossarial  in- 
dexes, by  the  late  VValti-  r  W.  Skh  at. 
8v'o,     Pp.  xxiv  -t-  882.     6s.  net. 

Ai  tie  Clirendon  Press. 


THE  CANTERBURY  TALES  from 
the  text  of  W.  W.  Skeat,  edition 
with  glossary  and  brief  notes  on  the 
language  and  metre  (World's  Clas- 
sics).    2S.  net. 

Oxford  Ura'vtrsity  Press,  London. 

THE  CHAUCER  CANON,  with  a 
discussion  of  the  works  associate.  1 
with  the  name  of  Geoffrey  Chaucer,  by 
W.W.  Skeat.  Crown  8vo.  Pp.  xii -r 
168.     3s.  6d.  net. 

At  the  Clarendon  Press. 

CHAUCER  AND  HIS  POETRY, 
by  George  Lyman  Kittredge.  8vo. 
Pp.  236.     6s.  6cl.  net. 

Harvard  University  Press. 

THE  TALE  OF  GAMELYN. 
Second  edition.  Edited  by  W.  W. 
Skeat.  Fcap  8vo.  Pp.  xl  +  64. 
Paper  boaid-;.      is   9H. 

At  the  Clarendon  Press. 


^  1^/igious  PForks, 


THE  ORMULUM,  edited  by  R.  M. 
White  and  R.  Holt.  Two  volumes. 
Fcap  8vo.  Pp.  Ixxxviii  +  598.  18s. 
net.  At  the  Clarendon  Press, 

lACOB  AND  lOSEP,  a  Middle 
English  Poem  of  the  Thirteenth  Cen- 
tury, edited  with  introduction,  notes, 
andglo?saryby  A.  S.  Napier.  Crown 
Svo.     Pp.  xxxii  +  42.     3s.  net. 

At  the  Clarendon  Press. 

THE  PSALTER, or  Psalms  of  David, 
and  Certain  Canticles,  with  a  trans- 
lation and  exposition  in  English,  by 
Richard  Rolleof  Hampole,  edited 
by  H.  R.  Bramley,  with  an  intro- 
duction and  glossary.  8vo.  Pp.xxiv-i- 
556.  2is.net.  At  the  Clarendon  Press. 


THE  MIRROUR  OF  THE  BLES- 
SED LYF  OF  JESU  CHRIST,  a 
translation  from  the  Latin  work  en- 
titled '  Meditationes  Vitae  Christi ', 
attributed  to  Cardinal  Bonaventura, 
made  before  the  year  14 10  by  Nicho- 
las Love,  Prior  of  the  Carthusian 
Monastery  of  Mount  Grace.  Edited 
with  introductory  note  and  glossary 
by  L.  F.  Powell.  Crown  4to.  Pp. 
330.  ais.net.  At  the  Clarendon  Press. 

THE  EXEMPLUM  IN  THE 
EARLY  RELIGIOUS  AND  DI- 
DACTIC LITERATURE  OF 
ENGLAND,  byj.  A.  Mosher.  Svo. 
Pp.  xii  +  150.     6s.  6d.  net. 

Columbia  University  Press. 


^  7{eligious  Lyrics, 


RELIGIOUS  LYRICS  OF  THE 
FOURTEENTH  CENTURY. 
Edited  by  Carleton  Brown.  Crown 
8vo,  pp.  xxiv  +  358.      IDS.  6d.  net. 

At  the  Clarendon  Press. 


THE  PENITENTIAL  LYRIC  IN 
MIDDLE  ENGLISH.  By  F.  A. 
Patterson.  Svo,  pp.  x  -1-  207.  7s  6d. 
net.  Columbia  University  Press. 


^  "Readers^   ^c. 


SPECIMENS  OF  EARLY 
ENGLISH,  edited  with  introduction, 
notes,  and  glossarial  index.  Thiee 
volumes.     Fcap  8vo. 

Part  I.  From  Old  English  Homi- 
lies to  King  Horn  (a.d.  1150  to 
a. D.  1300),  by  R.  Morris.  Second 
edition  revised.  Pp.  c  -1-  554.  7s.  6d. 
net. 

Part  II.  From  Robert  of  Gloucester 
to  Gower  (a.d.  1298  to  a.d.  1393), 
by  R.  Morris  and  W.  W.  Skeat. 
Fourth  edition.  Pp.  xl  -I-  490.  7s.  6d. 
net. 

Part  III.  From  the  Ploughman's 
Crede  to  the  Shepheardes  Calender 
(a.d.  i394-i579)>  by  W.  W.  Skeat. 
Sixth  edition.  Pp.  xxxii  +  550.  7s.  6d. 
net.  At  the  Clarendon  Press. 


SELECTIONS  FROM  EARLY 
MIDDLE  ENGLISH,  1130-1250, 
edited  with  introductions  and  notes 
by  Joseph  Hall.  Crown  Svo,  cloth, 
21s.  net.  Separately  :  Part  I,  Texts, 
pp.  viii  +  222,  7s.  6d.  net;  Part  II, 
Notes,  pp.  iv  +  676,  15s.  net. 

At  the  Clarendon  Press. 


FOURTEENTH  CENTURY 
VERSE  AND  PROSE,  edited  with 
introduction  and  notes  by  Kennkth 
SiSAM.  Crown  8vo.  pp.  xlviii -t- 292. 
With  a  Glossary  by  J.  R.  R.  Tolkien, 
pp.  16S.      los.  6d.  net. 

Separately,  Text,  Introduction 
and  Notes,  7s.  6d.  net.  Glossary, 
4s.  6d.  net.     At  the  Clarendon  Press. 


5  Miracle  Tlays. 


ENGLISH  MIRACLE  PLAYS, 
MORALITIES,  AND  INTER- 
LUDES, being  specimens  of  the 
pre-Elizabethan  drama,  by  A.  W. 
Pollard.  Seventh  revised  edition, 
8s.  6d.  net.      At  the  Clarendon  Press. 


YORK  PLAYS.  The  Plays  per- 
formed by  the  Crafts  or  Mysteries  of 
York  on  the  day  of  Corpus  Christi. 

%  Miscellaneous   Texts. 


Edited  with  introduction  and  glossary 
by  L.  TouLMiN  Smith.  3  plates.  8vo, 
pp.  Ixxviii-f  558.      2ts.  net. 

At  the  Clarendon  Press. 

THE  ASSUMPTION  OF  THE 
VIRGIN,  from  the  N-Town  Cycle, 
edited  by  W.  W.  Greg.  8vo,  pp.  76. 
Paper  cover,  4s.  6d.  net. 

At  the  Clarendon  Press. 


THE  PROVERBS  OF  ALFRED, 
edited  with  introduction,  notes,  and 
glossarial  index,  by  W,  W.  Skeat. 
Fcap  8vo,  pp.  xlvi  +  94.     3s. 

At  the  Clarendon  Press. 


EARLY  ENGLISH  PROVERBS, 
chiefly  of  the  thirteenth  and  fourteenth 
centuries,  with  illustrative  quotations, 
collected  and  edited  with  notes  by 
W.  W.  Skkat.  Fcap  8vo,  pp. 
xxiv+148,  and  portrait  of  John 
Wyclif.     5s.  net. 

At  the  Clarendon  Press. 


POEMS  OF  LAURENCE  MINOT, 
edited  with  introduction  and  notes 
by  Joseph  Hai  l.  Third  edition, 
revised  and  reset.  Fcap  8vo,  pp. 
176.     4s.  6d.  net. 

At  the  Clarendon  Press. 

THE  SERPENT  OF  DIVISION, 
by  John  Lydgate,  the  Monk  of 
Bury,  edited  with  introduction, 
notes,  and  glossary,  by  H.  N 
MacCracken,  with  three  full-page 
reproductions  from  contemporary 
illuminations  accompanying  the  text. 
4to,  pp.  76.     los.  net. 

Yale  University  Press. 


^  Some  Latin  Texts. 


OPERA  HACTENUS  INEDITA 
ROGERI  BACONI,  edited  by 
Robert  Steele.  8vo,  stiff  paper 
covers.  Ease.  I,  7s.  6d.  net ;  II-IV, 
ics.  6d.  net  each  ;  V,  28s,  net. 

At  the  Clarendon  Press. 

WALTER  MAP'S  DE  NUGIS 
CURIALIUM,  edited  by  M.  R. 
James.  AnecdotaOxoniensia,  Mediae- 
val Series,  XIV.  Crown  4to,  rag- 
made  paper,  pp.  326.  i8s.  6d.  net. 
At  the  Clarendon  Press. 


lOANNIS  SARESBERIENSIS 
POLICRATICI  Libri  VIII  recog- 
novit  commentario  instruxit  C.  C.  J. 
Webb.  Two  volumes.  8vo,  pp.  1  -»- 
368  and  viii-f-5TO.     36s.net. 

At  the  Clarendon  Press. 

NOVA  LEGENDA  ANGLIAE,  as 
collected  by  John  of  Tynemouth, 
John  Capgrave,  and  others,  and  first 
printed,  with  New  Lives,  by  Wynkyn 
de  Worde,  1516.  Re  edited  with 
fresh  material  from  MS.  and  printed 
sources  by  C.  Horstman.  Two 
volumes.  8vo,  pp.  Ixviii  +  506  +  732. 
36s.  net.  At  the  Clarendon  Press. 


^   'Bibliography. 


A  MANUAL  OF  THE  WRITINGS 
IN  MIDDLE  ENGLISH,  1050-1400, 
a  source  book  for  the  history  of 
English  Literature,  by  John  E. 
Wells.     Med.  8vo,  pp.   956,   with 


two  Supplements  :  I  (1919^,  pp.  90; 
II  (1923),  pp.  114;  23s.  6d.  net. 
Supplements  separately,  each  6s.  6d. 
net.  Yale  University  Press, 


PE   Sv/eet,  Henry 

1101    A  new  English  grammar 

SB   cist  ed.j 

V.2 


PLEASE  DO  NOT  REMOVE 
SLIPS  FROM  THIS  POCKET 


UNIVERSITY  OF  TORONTO 
LIBRARY